JP2017192461A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably detecting a fraudulent act.SOLUTION: A main control device 110 includes a generator ratio management chip 207, winning information is acquired from an MPU 201, and a generator ratio and a continuous generator ratio are calculated by the generator ratio management chip 207 and recorded in a second reading memory 264a as a nonvolatile memory. When an inspection apparatus 300 is connected to an inspection terminal 207a, generator ratio data 264a and continuous accessory ratio data 264b recorded in the second reading memory 264a are outputted to the inspection apparatus 300.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, when a game medium is launched by a launching means into a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and the gaming medium wins any one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of winning holes are determined in advance. There is a gaming machine in which game media is paid out to a player. In addition, a part of the winning opening is provided with an accessory, and the operation of the accessory affects the winning of the game medium (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2003-340046 A

  Now, among the fraudsters, there is an accessory provided by illicitly actuating the accessory at the prize opening provided with an accessory or guiding the game medium to win the prize opening. There are those who want to increase the number of prizes received at the winning prize openings. However, the response to discover such fraud is insufficient.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraud.

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a gaming area provided with a plurality of winning holes including a first winning hole having a combination that operates based on a game, and a gaming medium as the gaming area. The launching means for launching the game, the winning detection means for detecting the winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening provided for each winning opening, and the game medium launched by the launching means are either A payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game media to a winning opening for the game medium when the winning detection means detects that the winning opening has been won, and payout by the payout means Storage control means for accumulating and storing in the storage means information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of played game media; In the storage means Game machine characterized by comprising to output means for at least outputting a signal based on said stored information, a.

  A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information while the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including the first winning hole having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium fired by the launching means has been won in any one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of gaming media with respect to the winning opening for which the game medium has been won Is paid out by the payout means. In addition, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. The And the signal based on the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage means at least is output by an output means. As a result, among the number of game media paid out as a result of winning the winning award based on the output signal, the bonus rate that is the ratio of the first winning award (ie, the actuating action) Can be analyzed and fraudulent acts can be found based on the ratio of the actors.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means stored in the storage means is: It is held while the power is turned off. As a result, the gaming medium paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying means for a long period of time regardless of whether or not the power to the gaming machine is turned on. The information relating to the ratio of the numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the thing which received the signal output from the output means can analyze the ratio of the gaming machine for a long period of time, there is an effect that it can be detected including past fraud.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a holding ball storage area, and a holding ball execution area. (A) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot random number table, (b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot type table, (c) is the number of reservation balls 2 It is the figure which showed typically an example of the variation pattern table for jackpots in the case of (2), and (d) is the figure which showed typically an example of the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table when the number of reservation balls is 2 (E) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table when the number of reserved balls is two. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the switch reading process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio management main process performed by the accessory ratio management chip | tip in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a part of setting information reception process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the accessory ratio calculation process performed by the accessory ratio management chip | tip in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the test result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. (A) is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, (b) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control apparatus, (C) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prize information storage process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the test result output process performed by the accessory ratio management chip in a main controller.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 26, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). Yes.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

  The frame button 22 is, for example, a button that is pressed by the player when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later. The frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for causing the player to select the contents of the so-called super reach, which is an aspect of the fluctuation effect.

  The variation effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as described later, a ball fired on the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (a second starting port 64b described later). 2), the symbol (starting prize) is executed as a trigger, and after the symbol (the third symbol described later) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, This is an effect of presenting the result of the lottery performed (whether or not a big hit) to the player.

  The stage is an effect mode in which the various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and in the pachinko machine 10, there are 3 types of “city stage”, “empty stage”, and “island stage”. There are two stages. Various effects such as the above-described variation effects and reach effects executed during the variation effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

  The stage change is performed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period when the fluctuating effect is not performed or during a high-speed fluctuation in which the 3rd symbol is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation manner invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, it is repeatedly changed in the order of “city stage” → “empty stage” → “island stage” → “city stage” →. In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, “city stage” is set as the initial stage.

  Further, when the normal reach effect is started in the variable effect performed in the third symbol display device 81, when the normal reach is developed to the super reach, the selection screen for the super reach effect mode is displayed in the third symbol during the normal reach. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81.

  On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the effect mode of super reach are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. If the player presses the frame button 22 while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, based on the production mode candidate selected when developing into super reach, the production mode of super reach is determined, and super reach is executed in the third symbol display device 81 according to the production mode.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. However, instead of the frame button 22, the player makes a predetermined direction with respect to the pachinko machine 10 (for example, forward with respect to the pachinko machine 10). , Rearward, rightward and leftward), and may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted. Then, based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the super reach effect mode may be selected.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, on the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front, there is provided a display lamp 34 with a built-in light emitting means such as an LED that can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2). ) Can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42 and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

  In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown).

  When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. The sphere launch interval in the sphere launch unit 112a is set to about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of balls for nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a first normal winning opening 63 a, The second normal winning port 63b, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion is the back side of the inner frame 12 Attached to. The first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. And is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate a variation display that is performed in accordance with a ball entering (start winning prize) at any one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b according to the lighting state of the LED 37a, or a variation display. As a stop symbol after the end, a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning is indicated by a lighting state, or the variation among the balls entered in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b varies. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by the lighting state. The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the light emission color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with few LEDs by the combination of the light emission color.

  In this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a big hit is made with respect to the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is determined (a big lottery lottery). Is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

  The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit as a stop pattern after the end of the change executed in accordance with the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. In the case of jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “2R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of two rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds and becomes a short-time state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability change, probability change state), in other words, a special gaming state (jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. The high probability state (during probability change, probability change state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which a hit probability of a second symbol, which will be described later, increases and a ball easily enters the second start port 64b.

  On the other hand, the “low probability state” means a time when the probability change is not in progress and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second start port 64b. A game state in which a ball is easy to enter.

  Instead of changing the winning probability of the second symbol, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the time for the later-described electric accessory attached to the second start port 64b to be released, or once according to the second symbol. It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that an electric accessory is open | released in the hit. Specifically, in the short-time state, the time for which the electric accessory attached to the second start port 64b is opened is longer than in the case other than the time-short state, or the number of times the electric combination is released per hit. May be made larger than in cases other than the short-time state. Further, in the short-time state, at least two of the increase in the probability of hitting the second symbol, the lengthening of the opening time of the electric accessory, and the increase in the number of opening times of the electric accessory may be performed simultaneously. Good.

  A first normal winning opening 63a is provided on the lower left side of the gaming area, and a second normal winning opening 63b is provided on the lower right side of the gaming area. When a ball enters the first ordinary winning opening 63a, a first ordinary winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, which is caused by turning on the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c. 8 balls will be paid out as prize balls. Further, when a ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, eight balls are paid out as prize balls. It should be noted that the number of winning balls when a ball is won at the first normal winning slot 63a and the number of winning balls when a ball is won at the second normal winning slot 63b are not necessarily the same. The number of prize balls may be different from the ball, the latter being 8 balls or the like.

  A variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 and a second symbol display device 83. The 3rd symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the fluctuation display on the 1st symbol display device 37, triggered by a ball (start winning prize) entering one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. The liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display (variable effect) of the third symbol is configured. The second symbol display device 83 is provided with a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs that variably display the second symbol with the passage of the sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) to be described later, for example, left, middle And the three symbol rows on the right are displayed.

  Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, the display of the gaming state according to the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the decorative display corresponding to the display on the first symbol display device 37 is performed. This is performed by the third symbol display device 81. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten kinds of main symbols with numbers from “0” to “9”. Each main symbol is composed of numbers from “0” to “9” on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached symbols that imitate characters such as furoshiki, helmet, etc., almost full front of the wooden box, An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a big hit, the variable display (variation effect) in which the same main symbols are aligned on the effective line L1. ) Is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the change display is finished. When shifting to the high probability state (probability variation state) after the big hit, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which odd numbers are added (corresponding to “high probability symbols”) are aligned on the effective line L1. On the other hand, when shifting to the low probability state after the jackpot, the variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the even numbers are added (corresponding to “low probability symbols”) are aligned on the active line L1.

  As shown in FIG. 4 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two vertically, and the lower 2/3 displays the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable manner (variation effect). The main display area Dm to be displayed and the other upper third are the sub display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, and the like. In addition, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided in the lower bottom side center portion of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, the symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display region Dm1, the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display region Dm2, and the display region A symbol row Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

  In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in ascending order or descending order of numbers, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is scrolled from the top to the bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

  In the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each variation effect, the third symbol is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Stopped display. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  The sub display area Ds is horizontally long above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and notice effect images, respectively. The image displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 gives the player an expectation that is a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The reserved ball number display area Db is the number of held balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which variation display (variation effect) has not been executed among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. Is an area to display.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and it is suggested to the player that the player is more likely to make a big hit than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action or is usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed when the color of the hair, the color of the normal white bee, or the appearance of another character appears.

  On the other hand, when a ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b while the variation effect (variation display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of entrances is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the reserved ball number display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number symbol (“●” symbol) is displayed per one reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number symbols. .

  That is, when one reserved ball number symbol is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one ball, and when four reserved ball number symbols are displayed, Indicates that the number of balls is four. Further, when the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the balls entering the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are configured to be held up to a maximum of 4 times in total, but the maximum number of balls held is 4 times in total. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved ball number display area Db, the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or an area divided into four areas is set for the number of reserved balls. Only different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a symbol “◯” and a symbol “x” are alternately lit as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes through the through gate 67. is there. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory provided at the second start port 64b is It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is retained up to 4 times, and the number of retained spheres is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also displayed on the second symbol retention lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holdings is displayed by the number of lights of the second symbol holding lamp 84.

  Note that the second symbol variation display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, instead of turning on the second symbol holding lamp 84, a variation display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the passage through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times as in the case of the second start port 64b, and is not limited to four times, but three times or less (for example, eight times). It may be set to. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  A first start port 64a is disposed below the variable display unit 80, and a second start port 64b is disposed below the first start port 64a. The first start port 64a is provided with an opening portion into which a sphere can enter upward. The opening of the first start port 64a is always open, and a ball can enter. When a ball enters the first start port 64a, the first start port switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by the first start port switch 208a being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 provides a variation effect of the third symbol. Executed. The first start port 64a is also one of the winning ports through which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering an opening through which a ball enters the second starting port 64b. The electric accessory opens or closes the two blades to bring the second start port 64b into an open state (enlarged state) or a closed state (reduced state). In a normal state, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the blades of the electric power tool are closed (the blades are erected upward), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b. It is difficult.

  When the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol “◯”, the electric accessory at the second start port 64b is operated for a predetermined time. From the state where the blades of the electric accessory stand upward while the electric accessory is being operated. It will be in the state which moved to substantially V shape (reverse C shape), and the 2nd starting port 64b will be in an open state. When the second start port 64b is in the open state, the ball can enter the second start port 64b or the ball can enter more easily than in the closed state. That is, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, when the second symbol is stopped by hitting the symbol “◯” and the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball enters the second starting port 64b. Thus, a lot of lottery lotteries can be made.

  When a ball enters the second start port 64b, a second start port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second start port switch 208b. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 provides a variation effect of the third symbol. Executed. The second starting port 64b is also one of the winning ports through which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally elongated large winning port (also referred to as a large open port or a specific winning port) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery in the main controller 110 is a big hit, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to become a big hit stop symbol. The stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or 10 balls have been won).

  The special winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the special winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the special winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example.

  Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big win, the big winning hole solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate downwards in the front to temporarily form an open state where the ball is likely to win the big winning hole 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  When a ball enters the big prize opening 65a, the big prize opening switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times that the big prize opening switch 208e is turned on is counted. The number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a is counted, and the closing condition of the big prize opening 65a is determined. In addition, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the turning on of the big prize opening switch 208e. By repeating the open state and the closed state of the big prize opening 65a due to the jackpot, it becomes easy for many balls to win the big prize opening 65a, and the player is given a game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls will be paid out than usual. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When a special winning opening and a large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. The game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special gaming state in response to the ball winning in the specific winning opening while the specific winning opening is opened.

  A through gate 67 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for passing a sphere in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main controller 110 causes the second design ( A lottery will be held.

  As a result of lottery of the second symbol (ordinary symbol) performed on the ball that has passed through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a win, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the second symbol as “ After the symbol “O” is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second start port 64b is activated. As a result, the blade of the electric accessory that makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b moves from a substantially vertical state to a substantially V shape (reverse C shape), and the ball is moved for a predetermined time. Can enter the second starting port 64b, or a state in which the sphere is easier to enter than in the closed state.

  Adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for adhering certificate stamps, identification labels, and the like are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. In addition, the balls that have entered the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through a switch for detecting the balls that are provided for each winning hole. The The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. .

  Here, the ball launched into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. Therefore, the balls that have entered these winning ports 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out port 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to grasp the number of balls fired in the game area (the number of balls used in the game). Further, the out switch 208f detects a ball that has actually passed through the game area and has entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. In other words, a ball that has been launched into the game area but caught somewhere in the game area and as a result has not been used in the game is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to suppress counting of balls that have not been used in the game as a result of being shot in the game area.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  In addition, the main control board is provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting performances such as a proportion of a game machine can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, the backpack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a so that only the inspection terminal 207a is exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection apparatus 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection apparatus 300 can inspect game performance such as the proportion of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. Balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 130, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated.

  In the main control device 110, the main hits of the pachinko machine 10, such as jackpot lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83, are performed. Execute the process. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processing.

  The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. Then, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the open / close plate of the big prize opening 65a. A solenoid 209 comprising a large winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands and control signals via the input / output port 205. Send.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  Further, the input / output port 205 includes a switch group and a sensor group including various switches for detecting a ball that has entered each winning opening, and a ball that has been guided to the ball discharging path through each winning opening and out opening. Are connected to a later-described RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 outputs signals output from the various switches 208 and RAM erase signals output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

  The main control device 110 is provided with an accessory ratio management chip that manages information related to the accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The accessory ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the signal line 206, receives information necessary for management of the accessory ratio from the MPU 201, processes the received information, and stores the information, thereby enabling the role of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information related to physical ratios.

  An inspection terminal 207 a is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 that inspects performance such as the proportion of a gaming machine, and when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a via a cable and a connector, Information relating to the accessory ratio managed by the accessory ratio management chip 207 and other information relating to the inspection are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. The inspection apparatus 300 can determine whether or not the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is within a normal range based on the information regarding the accessory ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 6, the detailed structure of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of main controller 110.

  As described above, the RAM erase switch 253 is connected to the input / output port 205 as the input side, and the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol hold lamp 84, the payout as the output side. In addition to the control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 being connected, as various switches 208 connected as the input side, a first start port switch 208a for detecting a winning ball in the first start port 64a, a second start A second start port switch 208b for detecting a ball won in the mouth 64b, a first ordinary winning port switch 208c for detecting a ball won in the first ordinary winning port 63a, and a second ordinary winning port 63b A second normal prize opening switch 208d for detecting a ball, a big prize opening switch 208e for detecting a ball won in the big prize opening 65a, Out switch 208f for detecting a ball that has won a prize port 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and a ball that has entered the out port 66 and has been guided to the ball discharge path, and the inner frame 12 and the front surface A door opening switch 208g for detecting that at least one of the frames 13 is locked and opened is connected.

  The input port 205 includes a first port 205a to which the output of the first start port switch 208a is input, a first 2 port 205b to which the output of the second start port switch 208b is input, and an output of the first normal winning port switch 208c. Is input to the ordinary 1 port 205c, the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is input to the ordinary 2 port 205d, the output of the winning winning opening switch 208e is input, and the out switch 208f. Are connected to the output port 205f and the door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected.

  The MPU 201 executes a switch read process (see FIG. 11) for checking the state of various switches in a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first 1 port 205a, the first 2 port 205b, the ordinary 1 port 205c, the ordinary 2 port 205d, the big prize winning port 205e, and the out port 205f, and the winning prize winning port And the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and the number of balls won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, Count the number of balls launched into the game area. And the number of each counted ball and the game state at that time (whether it is a big hit, whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, or in an error state, etc.) It is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The accessory management chip 207 calculates and manages the accessory ratio based on the number of balls. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

  The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a prize ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main control device 110 executes main processing of the pachinko machine 10 by using various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables 202 a to 203 d stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the main controller 110 is powered on, the accessory ratio It is transmitted to the management chip 207.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters are used mainly for lottery lottery, setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used by the MPU 201 of the control device 110. In the description of the various counters, the various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

  For setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot symbol used for selecting the jackpot symbol. 1 type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first random number counter C1 are used. .

  The second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. As will be described in detail later, the RAM 203 is provided with a holding ball storage area 203b composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). Each of these areas has a first start port 64a and Each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second start port 64b.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 899) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 899 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is the composition which returns to. When the first per-random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first per-random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball wins one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b ( At the timing of starting winning), the value of the first per-random number counter C1 at that time is the first per-random number counter storage area in any of the on-hold areas 1 to 4 provided in the on-hold ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 203b1. The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that is a big jackpot, the jackpot is determined.

  Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. The jackpot random number table 202a is used for a low probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (period in which the probability change is not in progress), and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a jackpot than the low probability state. There are two types of high-probability states that are used in the case of high-probability states with high probability (during probability change). The numbers of random numbers that are jackpots included in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 899. In this first hit random number counter C1, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are big hits in the low probability state is 3, and the values “7, 307, 582” are stored in the big hit random number table 202a. ing.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state, the number of random number values (big hit random number values) that are jackpots is 30, and the values “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322” , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 "are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number value is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a so that the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state are not duplicated. It is set. Here, if there is a value that is a jackpot random value regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, and there is a possibility that the possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned increases. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that is a big hit, Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the big hit type when the big hit is reached, and is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99), and the maximum value (for example, 0 to 99). In the case of a counter that can take a value, the counter returns to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball starts either the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. At the timing of winning the winning (start winning), the value of the first hit type counter C2 at that time is the first hit random number counter C1 out of the holding first to fourth areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first hit type counter storage area 203b2 of the same reserved area as the stored reserved area.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that falls outside, the variation pattern in the variation effect In addition, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as “stop type”) is the one at the time of detachment. On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in one holding area in the holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the big hit time. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

  The value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically illustrating an example of the jackpot type table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the first jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

  As described above, as the jackpot type, as described above, the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 rounds of jackpot, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after jackpot of 15 rounds. There is a “15R normal jackpot” that becomes a short-time state during the number of fluctuations, and a “2R probability variable jackpot” in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds.

  In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with a value of a first jackpot type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8B, the value “0-39” of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 15R probability variable big hit, and the value “40˜ 79 ”is associated, and the value“ 80 to 99 ”of the first hit type counter C2 is associated with the 2R probability variation big hit.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a big hit value, the big hit type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the big hit type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20”, “15R probability variable big hit” is determined as the big hit type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “60”, the big hit type is “ If “15R normal jackpot” is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90”, “2R probability variation jackpot” is determined as the jackpot type.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case of jackpot, the 15R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R probability variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . Note that the probability that each jackpot type is selected in the case of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each big hit type is defined in the big hit type table.

  The probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each gaming state is prepared, and the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type in each jackpot type table may be changed.

  In addition, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the start opening that has entered the ball. That is, as the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball storage area 203b triggered by entering the first start port 64a is a jackpot random number, For example, “15R probable big hit” is 40%, “15R normal big hit” is 40%, “2R probable big hit” is 20%, and the ball is stored in the holding ball storage area 203b when triggered by the second start port 64b. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a jackpot random number, for example, “15R probability variation jackpot” is 55%, “15R normal jackpot” is 40%, “2R probability variation jackpot” "May be 5%.

  In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first start port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second start port 64b are prepared, and each jackpot type table is associated with each jackpot type in each jackpot type table. What is necessary is just to change the number of values of the counter C2. In the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the values of the various counters stored in each area are awarded to any of the starting ports of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. A flag indicating whether it is stored together is also stored, and based on the flag, the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided corresponding to each of the holding first to fourth areas, and the value of various counters stored in the corresponding area is determined by the flag of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. Which jackpot type is used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag indicating which start opening is stored A table may be selected.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of detachment displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol. 3 stoppages: “rear out of front / rear”, where the final stop symbol stops other than before / after the reach symbol, and “completely out” where no reach occurs. A production) pattern is selected.

  The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the ball is placed in one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. At the timing of winning (start winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first per-random number counter C1 in the holding first to fourth areas provided in the holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 in the same reserved area as the reserved area.

  Corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C <b> 3, a plurality of stop pattern tables 202 c having different ranges of random number values to be selected for the stop type are provided in the ROM 202. The plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

  For example, in a high-probability state, a large stop pattern table 202c having a random value range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is selected so that a reach effect is not selected more than necessary because a big hit is likely to occur. Therefore, “completely out” is easily selected. In this stop pattern table 202c, the “rear and back-off reach” is narrowed to 98,99, and the “reach other than back-and-forth off” is also narrowed to 90 to 97, and “rear and back-off reach” and “reach other than back-and-forth off” are difficult to select. Become.

  In the low probability state, the random value range corresponding to the stop type “completely off” is 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for entering the ball into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. Narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, and “completely out” is difficult to select. In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random values corresponding to the stop type of “reach other than front and back deviation” is widened to 80 to 97, and “reach other than front and rear deviation” is easily selected. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long production time. Therefore, it is possible to secure the time for entering the ball into the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b, and the variation by the third symbol display device 81. The display is easily performed continuously. Also in the latter stop pattern table 202c, the range of random number values corresponding to the stop type of “front / rear out of reach” is set to 98,99.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). In addition, at the timing when the ball wins at one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (start winning prize), the value of the variation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Out of the reserved first to fourth areas, the first random number counter C1 is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reserved area as the reserved area.

  The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the MPU 201 performs a variation effect based on various counters stored in one reserved area, the MPU 201 stores the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the reserved area and the ROM 202. A variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table 202d. Specifically, the determination of the variation pattern is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, and the third symbol reach type and detailed symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The change mode is determined, and the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect and the execution mode of the notice effect are determined.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a big hit variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of a big hit and a deviation variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of a loss as the fluctuation pattern table 202d. Also, as the deviation variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, depending on whether the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of probability change, or a normal low-probability state excluding the short-time state, A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

  Furthermore, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 includes a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 0 (that is, when there is no reserved ball), a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is four are provided separately.

  Note that, as in the present embodiment, it is not always necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls, and each variation pattern table 202d1 to 202d3 is simply changed so that a table referred to on the basis of the number of reserved balls is changed. May be prepared. For example, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be prepared separately for a table that is referenced when the number of reserved balls is less than 3, and a table that is referenced when the number of reserved balls is 3 or more. . Further, in each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining a table to be referred to may be different. For example, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is less than three and a table that is referred to when the number of retained balls is three or more. A different table 202d2 may be prepared for each number of reserved balls, and a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 may be prepared regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  FIG. 8C is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, out of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202.

  The jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the jackpot type regardless of the number of reserved balls. Specifically, it is divided into 15R jackpot common jackpots that are referenced when 15R probability variable jackpots and 15R regular jackpots are determined as jackpot types, and 2R probability variable jackpots that are referenced when 2R probability variable jackpots are determined. Yes. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

  When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is a value that is a big hit (big hit random number value), the variation pattern according to the big hit type corresponding to the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same holding area A group to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 is determined. In the group (group) of the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the reserved area. Is done.

  In common with 15R jackpot, three variation patterns of variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds are selectable. Is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

  The variation A is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 performs a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the so-called super reach in which the third symbols are arranged after the reach having a variation time longer than the normal reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. Super reach includes, for example, long reach that has a long reach in addition to reach that develops from normal reach. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the so-called special reach in which the third symbols are arranged after the reach having a longer variation time than the super reach is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that further develops after the super reach, and a special reach in which the development destination from the normal reach is different from the super reach.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for the fluctuation A in the 15R jackpot common table. 11 to 99 for B and 100 to 198 for variation C. In the 15R jackpot common table, since it is selected when the 15R probability variable jackpot or 15R normal jackpot, the variation C for which special reach is executed is easily selected in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It has become. However, by configuring so that the variation A in which normal reach is performed and the variation B in which super reach is performed are selected, it is possible to provide a game that can expect a big hit from any reach.

  The pachinko machine 10 has a large number of products with different production contents for each reach. For example, the super-reach includes a rear image (a third image which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81). Reach that quickly changes the image displayed on the back side of the image), reach that suddenly displays a certain character, etc. In addition, a notice effect before the start of fluctuation is added, an effect that becomes a big hit by re-variation A plurality of reach with different production contents, such as those to which is added. The main control device 110 determines only the variation A, the variation B, and the variation C as the variation pattern when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 15R normal big hit, and the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 determines each variation A˜. A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. In accordance with the detailed variation pattern, a variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 91.

  For the 2R probability variation jackpot only, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” with a variation time of 59 seconds is prepared. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, regardless of the number of reserved balls, all the values that can be taken by the variation type counter CS1 as shown in FIG. 0R) is associated with 2R fluctuations. That is, when the jackpot variation type is 2R probability variation jackpot, 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

  When the 2R variation is selected by the main control device 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. Therefore, when 2R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in main controller 110, variation effect is executed on third symbol display device 81 by a detailed variation pattern corresponding to 2R variation. In this pachinko machine 10, as a detailed variation pattern corresponding to 2R variation, for example, while displaying characters such as “chicken” or “girl” in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81, finally, A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol in accordance with lighting or blinking of a specific lamp, and the like are included.

  The variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether to add a notice effect for predicting the start of a jackpot or reach production before the start of the change or during the change production may be determined by another variation type counter, or when the reach is established, It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols of the third symbol to be stopped are shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol shifted back and forth).

  Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in the case of this pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, only the variation pattern of “2R variation” is selected. Instead of providing a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, only the association between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern in the case of 15R probability variation jackpots or 15R normal jackpots may be defined in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. In this case, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type, the 2R variation may be determined as the variation pattern without referring to the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only “2R fluctuation” is selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, but when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns. You may do it. In this case, even in a group dedicated to 2R probability variation jackpots, such as a common group for 15R jackpot, the variation type counter CS1 is associated with the variation pattern selected when the 2R probability variation jackpot is reached, and a certain reserved area is assigned. The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the reserved area.

  FIG. 8D schematically shows an example of the extraordinary (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 that is referred to when the number of reserved balls is two of the extraordinary (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8D, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 is used only for complete disconnection, which is referred to when complete disengagement is determined as the stop type at the time of disengagement. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the reach common that is referenced when a reach other than is determined, and the stop type at the time of a break, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups It is attached.

  When the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is not a big hit value (big hit random value), that is, a value that is out of the game, the gaming state is the normal time except for the short-time state When in the low probability state, according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area as the first per random number counter C1, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the hold area The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2.

  For complete deviation only, two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are prepared, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. It is associated. When the variation D or the variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol variation device 81 executes a variation effect that is stopped and displayed without reaching reach after the high-speed variation of the third symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 8 (d), in the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is two, the fluctuation D is associated with the fluctuations exclusively for complete deviation and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. 0 to 98, variation E is 99 to 198.

  In addition, for the reach in common, the above-described three variations A to C, that is, the variation A in which the variation time is 30 seconds and the normal reach is executed by the third symbol variation device 81, and the super reach is defined in the variation time 60 seconds. Three variation patterns are prepared so as to be selectable: variation B executed by the 3 symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the 3 symbol display device 81 for a special reach when the variation time is 90 seconds. In the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the variation common to reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 are associated with variation A of 0 to 98 and variation B of 99 to 190. The variation C is 191-198.

  FIG. 8E schematically shows an example of a deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, out of the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similarly to the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table. Only for complete outage, in which the variation D and the variation E can be selected as the variation pattern, and the reach common when the variation other than the front / rear out of reach and the reach other than out of front / rear is determined and the variation A to C can be selected as the variation pattern, Based on the stop type at the time of departure, it is divided into groups (groups), and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the change patterns that can be selected in the divided group.

  When the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in a certain holding area is a value that does not become a big hit, that is, a value that falls outside, when the gaming state is in a short-time state or a high probability state at the time of probability change, In accordance with the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area, the change pattern corresponding to the value of the change type counter CS1 stored in the hold area is the deviation (probability change) change pattern. It is determined from the table 202d3.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (e), in the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the variation D is associated with the variation of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of reserved balls is 2 and the variation type counter CS1. 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of reserved balls is 2, the correspondence among the common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. That is, the correspondence between each variation common to the reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same in the out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is a short-time state or a high-probability state at the time of a probable change, the ball is likely to enter the second start port 64b, and many complete deviations (variation E) with a long variation time are executed. If this is done, it takes time to start the next variation display, which may cause the player to wait and feel uncomfortable. Moreover, even if it is a hall | hole, an operation rate falls and it is unpreferable.

  Therefore, if the game state is completely lost when the game state is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the complete departure with a shorter variation time than in other game states (normal state excluding the time-short state) ( The deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured so that the variation D) can be easily selected. Thereby, by starting the next variation display at an early stage, the possibility of giving the player unpleasant feeling can be reduced. Moreover, it can suppress that an operation rate falls extremely.

  The variation pattern at the time of detachment is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, but may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters together (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.). Further, the selection of the detachment type is divided into the detachment (normal) variation pattern table and the detachment (probability variation) variation pattern table. However, even if the gaming state is normal, a plurality of reserved balls (for example, In the case of 4 at the maximum, 3 or more), the change display may be terminated at an early stage, and the selection may be made with reference to the deviation (probability change) change pattern table.

  Further, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 selected when the fluctuation type is a front / rear reach or non-front / rear reach, is the same regardless of the gaming state, Normally, the variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 do not include a common reach group, and these variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely deviated. In addition, a variation pattern table that is referred to when the stop type becomes reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth regardless of the game state may be prepared separately.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 that are selected when the fluctuation type is reach back and forth reach or reach other than back and forth is the same regardless of the gaming state. It may be different depending on the gaming state.

  Further, in each variation pattern table 202d2 and 202d3 shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the variation D and the variation E are simply set as “completely deviated variation”, and the “completely deviated variation” is selected. In such a case, the variation D and the variation E may be selected with a predetermined probability by referring to another table. Of course, in this case as well, a table corresponding to the number of reserved balls may be prepared.

  Returning to FIG. 7, the second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of, for example, 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the sphere has passed through either the left or right through gate 67. The number of random number values to be won is 149, and the range is “5 to 153”. In other words, when the value of the obtained second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 153”, it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol “◯” is displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) on the second symbol display device 83. While the lighting is displayed, the electric accessory of the second start port 64b is activated, and the second start port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second per-random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is once per timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). In addition to being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 displays the big hit lottery and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting (variation effect) and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The prize ball number table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a. Here, the details of the winning ball number table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the winning ball number table 202e.

  As shown in FIG. 9, in the winning ball number table 202e, as the “starting port type”, the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the big winning port 65a. Is defined, and for each winning opening, the “number of winning balls” corresponding to the winning opening is specified. Specifically, in the prize ball number table 202e, a prize ball number of 3 is associated with the first start opening 64a, a prize ball number of 2 is associated with the second start opening 64a, and the first normal prize is awarded. The number of prize balls 8 is associated with the mouth 63a, the number of prize balls 8 is associated with the second ordinary prize opening 63b, and the number of prize balls 12 is associated with the large prize opening 65a.

  The winning ball number table 202e defines the number of winning balls corresponding to each winning opening for all winning holes provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when a winning hole is provided in addition to the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, the winning ball number table 202e including the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole is included. Is defined.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same in the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b. Therefore, in the winning ball number table 202e, the “start opening type” is defined as “ordinary winning opening” by combining the first ordinary winning opening 63a and the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and is associated with the “ordinary winning opening”. You may prescribe 8 prize balls. Also, if the number of winning balls at the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is the same as “3”, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are combined in the winning ball number table 202e. The “starting port type” may be defined as “starting port”, and the number of prize balls 3 may be defined in association with the “starting port”.

  The prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201 that is executed when the main controller 110 is turned on. Used when calculating the ratio.

  The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Although details will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 supports three timings (triggers) as timings (triggers) for calculating the accessory ratios. The first is the number of balls fired, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio every time the number of balls fired reaches a predetermined number. The second is time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio when a predetermined time is reached. The third is the game time, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates an accessory ratio when a predetermined time has elapsed by the player.

  In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating one of “number of shots”, “time”, and “game time” is defined as the calculation timing (trigger) of the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When information indicating the “number of shots” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating the “predetermined number of balls” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “number of shots” and information indicating 500 balls as the “predetermined number of balls”, the ratio of the bonuses every time the number of shot balls reaches 500 In the management chip 207, an accessory ratio is calculated.

  When the information indicating “time” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating “predetermined time” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 are defined as “predetermined time” in the trigger information data 202f, the time is 12:00. At the timing of 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the accessory ratio management chip 207 calculates the accessory ratio.

  When information indicating “game time” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating “predetermined time”, which is a timing for calculating an accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f includes information indicating “game time” and information indicating 2 hours as “predetermined time”, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is used every 2 hours of game time. In the above, the ratio of the actors is calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201 that is executed when the main controller 110 is turned on, together with the prize ball number table 202e. This is used when the management chip 207 determines a trigger for calculating an accessory ratio.

  In addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 7, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the MPU 201, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, and an I / O. And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down (including when a power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter), the power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201. With this input, information on occurrence of power interruption is set by the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) to be executed. When it is determined in the main process (FIG. 17) of the MPU 201 that there is information on the occurrence of power interruption, the stack pointer and the value of each register at that time are stored in the RAM 203.

  On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 20), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 19).

  The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a start 1 counter 203d, a start 2 counter 203e, a general 1 counter 203f, a general 2 counter 203g, a big prize mouth counter 203h, an out It has at least a counter 203i.

  The reserved ball number counter 203a is one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14) periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. The number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) performed on the first symbol display device 37 is counted up to four times based on the entry into the ball (start winning prize) Counter. The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S616 in FIG. 16). Then, every time when the start winning is detected and the number of spheres with variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 every time the changing effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

  The value of the held ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of held balls) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by a held ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The held ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a start winning is detected and the held ball number counter 203a is incremented by one.

  The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the reserved ball number itself of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of suspensions of the change effect without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning is detected, a reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, so that the number of held balls of the fluctuating effect managed in the voice lamp control device 113 becomes noise. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls of the fluctuating effect held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of the above, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of held balls command.

  Note that the sound lamp control device 113 transmits a display reserved ball number command for notifying the number of held balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of held balls managed therein changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a reserved ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, not only the value of the held ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the reserved ball number command but also the reserved ball number command. The first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each value of C3 and variation type counter CS1 is also included.

  That is, when there is a start prize, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 are The voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the reserved ball number command.

  In the sound lamp control device 113, the values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the reserved ball number command are changed based on the respective values. Prior to the execution of the effect, the pre-reading is performed to determine what the change effect will look like (whether it will be a big hit, what the change time will be, etc.) before the change effect is executed. The execution of various effects can be determined based on the determination result based on the prefetching.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b includes a first per-random number counter C1, a first per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. It is a memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (start prize) in one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), each counter from the counter buffer The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas (holding first to first) so that data corresponding to one start winning (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) can be stored (holding) up to four times. 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

  The holding ball execution area 203c is data (each of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as jackpot lottery and setting of variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Value).

  When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the MPU 201 executes processing such as jackpot lottery and setting of variation display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. Of the data corresponding to each start winning (stored in each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the above-mentioned holding ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to one start winning is used as the holding ball execution area 203c. Shift to. Note that the shift in the present embodiment indicates that data stored in one area is moved to another area.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used for the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform jackpot lottery, change display (change effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Used by.

  In setting the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first jackpot type used for determining the jackpot type A winning type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining a stop type at the time of losing, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining a variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b includes the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 that are acquired from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball wins (starts winning) either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. Store each value.

  The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 for storing the value of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored. A type counter storage area 203b2 per unit, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  In this embodiment, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. However, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, 203b4 may be provided in any of the reserved ball storage areas.

  As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, data (each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (start winning) at the second starting port 64b is stored up to four times. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the older start prize is stored in time, and the data corresponding to the oldest start prize is stored in the hold first area.

  On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In the reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, the first random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first random number counter C1 and the value of the first type classification counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

  When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the fluctuating effect, the data stored in the reserved first area of the reserved ball storage area 203b (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) are stored in the reserved ball. The execution area 203c is shifted to each of the areas 203c1 to 203c4. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c is referred to in the fluctuation start process (see FIG. 17), and the big hit lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are set. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, the variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

  The change pattern and stop type determined here are notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the change pattern command and stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

  Details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the random number value in the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1 in the reserved first area is transferred to the first per-random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number value in the first per category counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first per category counter storage area 203c2, and the random number value in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. The random number value in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203c4.

  When the data shift to the holding ball execution area 203c ends, the holding first area becomes empty, and is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b. Shift processing is performed to pack the data in the area (first to third) having a smaller area number. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

  Here, a data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, when the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuating effect is made is “4”, and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203b. To do. In this state, when the data of the reserved first area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c and the reserved first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 stores the data of the other areas (second to fourth) respectively. Shift to the area with the smaller number (first to third). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

  Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the changing effect is performed is “2”, the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. The data shift ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift process is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), the number of data shifts can be reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

  In addition, you may comprise so that each data of a reservation area (2nd-4th) may be shifted to the area where an area number is one smaller irrespective of the presence or absence of data, respectively. In that case, since it is not necessary to determine whether or not data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), the creation of the program can be facilitated.

  Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The start 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls won at the first start port 64a, the start 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls won at the second start port 64b, and a universal counter 203f Is a counter that counts the number of balls won in the first normal winning opening 63a, the ordinary 2 counter 203g is a counter that counts the number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and the large winning opening counter 203h is a large A counter for counting the number of balls won in the winning opening 65a, an out counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). is there. These counters 203d to 203i are all set to zero as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after power-on (S616 in FIG. 16).

  Further, the MPU 201 performs the first port 205a, the first two ports 205b, the normal one in the switch reading processing (see FIG. 11) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) executed every 2 milliseconds. Referring to the port 205c, the ordinary 2 port 205d, the big prize opening port 205e and the out port 205f, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first ordinary winning opening switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. Then, it is determined whether or not a ball is detected in each of the big winning opening switch 208f and the out switch 208g. When a winning is made at any winning opening (a ball is detected at the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning opening where the winning is made is incremented by 1, and the ball at the out switch 208g. Is detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

  The counting of the number of spheres in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds. When 0.5 seconds elapse, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with information indicating the gaming state at that time, set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Is done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the winning prizes are again won at the winning points for the next 0.5 second. The number of balls played is counted for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won at each prize opening for each winning slot at every 0.5 second interval, and the balls guided to the ball discharge path are counted. The number (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates the counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio, so that it is not until the power is turned on. The number of balls won in each prize opening until the timing for calculating the object ratio, or until the next timing for calculating the object ratio after calculating the last object ratio It counts every time and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game).

  In this way, since the number of winning balls to the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is used in an actual game. Accurately understand the number of balls recognized as winning.

  Also, suppose that the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If these counts are performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207, the prize ratio management chip 207 guides the winning prizes to each winning opening and the ball discharge path at short intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds). The ball must be monitored, which increases the processing load and power consumption.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, these count results are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds by the count of the MPU 201. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, every 0.5 seconds. In addition, each prize is received after the power is turned on until it is the first time to calculate an accessory ratio, or until the next timing to calculate an accessory ratio after calculating the last accessory ratio. The number of balls won in the mouth may be counted for each winning mouth, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, winnings at each winning opening and balls guided to the ball discharge path are monitored. In the first place, these monitorings are the main games such as jackpot lottery and winning ball determination. This is necessary for performing such control, and is originally performed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls launched into the game area by the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning opening counted at 0.5 second intervals is used. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) are almost 0 or 1 and at most several. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). Even if the process of counting the number of () is performed, there is no significant effect.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first reading memory 263, a second reading memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 266. These are connected to each other via a bus 206. The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and the inspection terminal 207a.

  In addition, a large-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207. The capacitor 267 is charged while power is supplied to the main controller 110. When the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 Using the power charged in the capacitor 267, a process associated with power-off is executed. Instead of the capacitor 267, a chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  The CPU 261 is an arithmetic device that controls the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. By executing a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the CPU 261 performs a role in the pachinko machine 10. The property ratio management chip 207 performs management of the property ratio. By performing management of the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio management chip 207 by the CPU 261, it is possible to flexibly cope with a function change or specification change of the accessory ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

  The RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 includes a chargeable / dischargeable secondary battery (not shown). The RTC 266 always outputs the time while keeping the current time using the secondary battery as a power source. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is “time”, and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is the trigger setting area. When it coincides with or exceeds the “predetermined time” set in 265b, a process of calculating the accessory ratio is executed. Although details will be described later, for the first reading 263, the big hit information 263g, the open data 263h, the error data 263i, and the overtime data 263k are respectively jackpot information, door open information, error information or time. When external information is added, the current time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each information.

  The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various information set by the MPU 201, and is configured by an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) that is a volatile memory that can read and write data. The buffer 262 is provided with at least a first buffer 262a, a first buffer 262b, a first buffer 262c, a second buffer 262d, a big prize buffer 262f, a big hit middle buffer 262g, an open buffer 262h, an error buffer 262i, and the like. ing.

  The start 1 buffer 262a stores the value of the start 1 counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The start 2 buffer 262b stores the value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The common 1 buffer 262c stores the value of the common 1 counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The common 2 buffer 262d stores the value of the common 2 counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the winning prize counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the winning prize buffer 262e. The out buffer 262f stores the value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds.

  The jackpot buffer 262g stores information (jackpot information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is being jackpoted at 0.5 second intervals. When the game state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened, the information (door opening information) is stored in the opening buffer 262h. The in-error buffer 262i stores information (in-error information) when the gaming state set by the MPU 201 is in error at intervals of 0.5 seconds.

  In the accessory ratio management chip 207, setting (writing) is performed by the MPU 201 on various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 receives setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19). ). In the setting information reception process, the number of balls won for each winning mouth is counted based on various information set in the buffer 262, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball launched into the game area). And the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  The setting register 265 is a register for setting a setting value necessary for the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The setting register 265 includes at least a prize ball number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

  In the prize ball number data setting area 265a, a prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. In the trigger setting area 265b, trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set. When the main controller 110 is powered on, the prize ball number table 202e and trigger information data 202f are transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, the CPU 261 sets the winning ball number table 202e in the winning ball number data setting area 265a, and the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b.

  The winning ball number table 202e set in the winning ball number data setting area 275a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the bonus rate. Here, the number of winning balls when there is a winning at each winning opening is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 as information on the number of prize balls is supplied every time power is supplied. By setting to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machine models are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used for pachinko machines of different models, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is reached. When it is determined, a process for calculating a ratio of the accessory is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the accessory ratio is physically limited in the storage capacity in which the information related to the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Rather than fixing the timing, it is preferable to take into account the probability of jackpot and probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. Like the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the ratio of the accessory determined in consideration of the jackpot probability or the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202 and supplied with power. Each time the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio management chip 207 has the timing corresponding to the jackpot probability or the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous feature ratio can be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  Only the prize ball number table 202e and trigger information data 202f transmitted in the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is turned on are the prize ball number data. The setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are set. The start-up process is a so-called boot process and is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a lie prize ball number table and trigger information data from being set for the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b by an unauthorized person.

  The first reading memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. The first reading memory 263 includes a volatile memory that can read and write data, for example, an SRAM. The first reading memory 263 may be configured by a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory) which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

  The first reading memory 263 includes a start 1 counter 263a, a start 2 counter 263b, an ordinary 1 counter 263d, an ordinary 2 counter 263e, a big prize winning counter 263e, an out counter 263f, a jackpot data 263g, an opening data 263h, and an error. Data 263i and overtime data 263j are stored at least. These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on an initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( (See S710 in FIG. 18).

  These counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263 are referred to by the accessory ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when the timing of calculating the accessory ratio is reached, and necessary processing is executed. After that, the CPU 261 again initializes all the values to 0 (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio. .

  The start 1 counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first start port 64a before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the start 1 counter 203d indicating the number of balls won in the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds is set in the start 1 buffer 262a by the MPU 201, the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a by the CPU 261 (In other words, the number of balls that won the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 1 counter 263a.

  The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second start port 64b before the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls won in the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds is set in the start 2 buffer 262b by the MPU 201, the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b by the CPU 261 (In other words, the number of balls won in the second start port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b.

  The ordinary 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the first normal winning opening 63a before the timing for calculating the ratio of the items. When the value of the universal 1 counter 203f indicating the number of balls won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds is set in the ordinary 1 buffer 262c by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the ordinary 1 buffer 262c. The value (that is, the number of balls that won the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the ordinary 1 counter 263c.

  The common 2 counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b before the timing for calculating the ratio of the bonuses. When the value of the universal 2 counter 203g indicating the number of balls won in the second normal winning slot 63b for 0.5 seconds is set in the ordinary 2 buffer 262d by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the value in the ordinary 2 buffer 262d. The value (that is, the number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the ordinary 2 counter 263d.

  The big prize opening counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won in the big prize opening 65a before the timing of calculating the ratio of the items. When the value of the big prize opening counter 203h indicating the number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a for 0.5 seconds is set in the big prize opening buffer 262e by the MPU 201, the CPU 261 sets the value in the big prize opening buffer 262e. The value (that is, the number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big prize mouth counter 263e.

  The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls launched into the game area) until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. When the value of the out counter 203i indicating the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds is set in the out buffer 262f by the MPU 201, the value (that is, 0) set in the out buffer 262f by the CPU 261 is set. (The number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the accessory ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is “number of firings”, this out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (number of firings) indicated by the out counter 263f is the trigger setting area. When it becomes more than the “predetermined number of balls” set in 265b, the CPU 261 executes a process for calculating an accessory ratio.

  The jackpot data 263g includes the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has won a jackpot when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 has reached a jackpot before the timing of calculating the ratio of the bonuses. It is the data specified together. When the jackpot information indicating that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is being jackpoted is set in the jackpot buffer 262g by the MPU 201, the jackpot information is combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 by the CPU 261. It is added to the medium data 263g.

  The open data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is open when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the open state of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) before the timing for calculating the ratio of the objects. This is data defining the door opening information indicating that the state has been reached together with the time at that time. When the MPU 201 sets the door open information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open as the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 in the open buffer 262h, the CPU 261 sets the door open information. Is added to the open data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The in-error data 263g includes information in error indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in error before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. This data is defined together with the time. When the in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state is set in the in-error buffer 262i by the MPU 201, the in-error information is set by the CPU 261 together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Are added to the in-error data 263i.

  The off-time data 263j is stored in the pachinko machine 10 when the MPU 201 sets (writes) the buffer 262 in the late-night time period that is usually outside business hours (for example, between midnight and early morning 6:00). This is data that defines out-of-hours information indicating that some operation has been performed at midnight together with the time at that time. When setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed by the MPU 201, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266 by the CPU 262, and when it is determined that the time is in the midnight time zone, the overtime information is Together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, it is added to the overtime data 263j.

The second reading memory 264 is configured by a nonvolatile memory capable of reading and writing data, for example, a flash memory. The second reading memory 264 only needs to retain the stored data even when the power is turned off. Besides the flash memory, the second reading memory 264 can be a ferroelectric memory (FeRAM: Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) or a magnetoresistive RAM. (MRAM: Magnetorandom Random Access Memory), resistance change memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random)
(Access Memory) or the like. In addition, while the second reading memory 264 is configured by a DRAM, data is retained even when the power is turned off by continuously supplying a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 to the DRAM while the power is turned off. You may make it do.

  In the second reading memory 264, at least character combination data 264a, continuous character ratio data 264b, number of shot balls 264c, and game information data 264d are stored.

  The accessory ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the accessory ratio calculated at each timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous character ratio data 264b is data in which data representing the continuous character ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

  Here, of the total of the balls (prize balls) paid out to the player, the bonus ratio is paid out in accordance with winning in the second starting port 64a and the big winning port 65a in which the bonuses operate. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) is shown and is set to 70% or less. In addition, the consecutive character ratio is a ball (award) that is paid out with winning a prize to the big winning opening 65a in which a character operates continuously out of the total number of balls (award balls) paid out to the player. The ratio of the number of spheres) is shown and is set to 60% or less.

  Originally, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are the above-mentioned rates when the game ball trial test is conducted for 10 hours, but here, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b At each timing (trigger) for calculating the ratio of the actors indicated by the player, the CPU 261 until the first timing is reached after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the second starting port 64a and the big winning port 65a is calculated out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to Together with the time of day, it is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing, A ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in accordance with winning in the mouth 65a is calculated and recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power is turned off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to pay out while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio. Based on the number of spheres (prize balls), the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated and recorded in the bonus rate data 264a or the continuous bonus rate data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate can be used without omission for the number of prize balls that are paid out before the power is turned off. The ratio can be calculated.

  The number of balls won at the first start port 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls won at the second start port 64b indicated by the first counter 263b, The number of balls won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the first counter 263c, the number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the second counter 263d, and the large indicated by the big winning counter 263e. The number of winning balls associated with each winning mouth shown in the winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of balls won in the winning hole 65a. And the number of balls paid out for winning in each winning opening can be calculated for each winning opening. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

  As a result, the number of balls paid out as a result of winning a prize at the second start port 64b and the balls paid out as a result of winning a prize at the big prize port 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player. By calculating the ratio of the total to the number of items, it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio. Further, by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out as a result of winning the winning prize opening 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player, it is possible to calculate the consecutive character ratio.

  The shot ball number data 264c includes the total number of balls fired to the game area counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263, for each timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio, It is the data recorded together. An out counter 263f indicates the total number of balls that have been fired into the game area from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. When it is time to calculate an accessory ratio, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the shot ball number data 264c together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266.

  The gaming status data 264d includes the jackpot information 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, and the overtime data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263, the door opening information, the error information, and the overtime information. Is recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the ratio of an accessory, the jackpot information stored in the first reading memory 263 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i and the overtime data 263j stored, the door opening information, The in-error information and out-of-hour information and the time associated with each information are recorded in the gaming state data 264d by the CPU 261.

  At this time, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the jackpot is continuously generated as a gaming state, so the jackpot at the oldest time Only the information and the time are recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Similarly, when the information is stored in the data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the information on the oldest time and the information on the time when the door is open, the error information, and the out-of-hour information are stored. Only in the game state data 264d. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be kept small.

  When the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-hours information are recorded in the gaming state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) the pieces of information from the oldest time information, and enters the gaming state data 264d. Record. When the information recorded in the gaming state data 264d is output to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the order recorded. Thereby, since each information is output in order from the oldest time, the inspection apparatus 300 can easily analyze the change in the gaming state with the passage of time by analyzing the information in the output order.

  However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to store the information in the gaming state data 264d side by side from the information of the old time. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read out the game state data 264d in order from the oldest time information and transmit it to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, the information may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 in the order of recording, and the received information may be rearranged from the information at the old time by the inspection apparatus 300.

  The jackpot information 263g, the unlocking data 263h, the error data 263i, and the overtime data 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 correspond to the jackpot information, the door opening information, the error information, and the overtime information stored in the first reading memory 263, respectively. The game time data 264d may all be recorded together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d increases, the operation state of the pachinko machine 10 can be analyzed while seeing minute changes in the game state by outputting this to the inspection device 300.

  Here, information relating to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls fired to the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the shot ball number data 264c are respectively a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of jackpot information, door opening information, error information, and out-of-hours information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). When a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the combination ratio data 264a, continuous combination ratio data 264b, number of shot balls 264c or game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded. For example, the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured as a ring buffer, and each manages the position where information is written on the ring buffer. By preparing a memory separately in the second reading memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second reading memory 264, the writing position is shifted by one each time information is written, so that the oldest information is obtained. Can be deleted, and the latest information can be recorded there. As described above, by setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection apparatus 300 including the latest pachinko machine 10 state is analyzed. Can be done. By preparing a memory for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer in the second reading memory 264, even if the power is cut off halfway, From the continuation of the information stored so far, new information can be added and recorded.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated for the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 records the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the launch. The ball number memory 264c and the game state data 264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection device 300. When transmitting each data 264a-d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 records each information recorded in each data 264a-d (including recorded time information associated with each information). It reads in order and transmits to the inspection apparatus 300. By simply connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated and processing for transmitting each piece of information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed. Can be completed. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 can analyze the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and can quickly and easily find an illegal act from the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio.

  Specifically, in the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 from now on, when the upper limit number of recordable information (the predetermined number) set for each is not satisfied, the CPU 261 first stores the information in the data. The information recorded from the position where the information is written to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Transmit to device 300. On the other hand, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) determined for each, it is indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written. The position where the information is written is shifted by one by one from the position next to the recorded position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded), and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, The information recorded up to the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

  Since the second reading memory 264 is configured by a non-volatile memory, even when the power is cut off halfway, information on the ratio of the objects in the pachinko machine 10 is recorded in the second reading memory 264. Continue to be. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 can receive and analyze information related to the accessory ratio including information before the power is turned off.

  Here, among the cheating agents, the second starting port 64b can be obtained by illegally opening the electric member of the second starting port 64b by some method or guiding the ball to the second starting port 64b. Some are trying to increase the chances of winning big hits. Also, there are some that try to obtain a lot of prize balls by opening the open / close plate of the big prize opening 65a illegally by some method or guiding the ball to the big prize opening 65a. In the case of such an illegal act, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the consecutive accessory are increased.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, and in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the winning information from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to each winning opening is obtained. Then, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated and recorded at a predetermined timing. When the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, when the illegal act is performed, the illegal act can be found by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information relating to the number of balls launched into the game area and information relating to the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, when the ratio of the bonuses and the consecutive bonuses is high as a result of the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot into the gaming area and the information on the gaming state. be able to.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and is housed in one substrate box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. As a result, it is difficult for the fraudster to modify the winning information and the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. In addition, it is difficult to tamper with or delete the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate calculated and output by the bonus rate management chip 207.

  In addition, the accessory ratio management chip 207 includes a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264, and counts the number of balls won for each winning mouth in the first reading memory 263, and the first reading memory 263. Based on the number of balls won for each winning mouth counted in step (2), the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Here, the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory. In general, the non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes time for writing, and is from the viewpoint of durability. There is a limit to the number of writes. In the present embodiment, a first reading memory 263 configured by a volatile memory and a second reading memory 264 configured by a nonvolatile memory are separated. By performing the process of counting and storing the number of balls won for each mouth at a high speed, it is possible to count the balls won in each winning mouth without missing. Then, a process of calculating a bonus rate and a continuous bonus rate from the number of balls won for each winning slot stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording it in the second reading memory 264 at a predetermined timing ( Since the number of times of writing to the second reading memory 264 can be reduced by executing for each trigger), it is possible to suppress the above-described problem from being realized by using a nonvolatile memory.

  Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 15) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a sphere is launched at an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 at intervals of about 0.6 seconds.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, fluctuating effects and continuous The setting of the display mode of the effect performed in the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, such as a notice effect, is controlled.

  The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect mode at the time, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the frame button 22 is operated for purposes other than changing the stage, such as changing the super-reach effect, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

  The RAM 223 indicates a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, or indicates that the variable effect should be started in the on state. It has a variation start flag (not shown).

  The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

  The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and displays various screen displays such as a variation display (variation effect) of the third symbol and a jackpot effect at the time of a big hit, an audio lamp Control is performed according to a command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 111).

  The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231, ROM 232, work RAM 233, and image controller 236. A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236, and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different winning probability for winning the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot, there is a model having the same specifications as the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common part to reduce the cost.

  The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

  The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores effect data (character information) such as symbols (background symbols and third symbols) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 stores an area (not shown) in which a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 is decompressed to generate an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the decompressed plural This is a memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing display data for one frame generated using at least a part of the character information until the display is performed.

  The image controller 236 adjusts the timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to read the third data. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 to 17. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the startup process and the main process will be described.

  FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

  In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, a command to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the like is generated based on various processes, and is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

  For example, the reserved ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the fluctuation process (see FIG. 13) or the fluctuation start process (FIG. 14), which is one of the fluctuation processes, are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, the ball launch signal set when launching the ball in the processing of S111 described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

  Next, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the big winning opening (large opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the big hit state. A large opening opening / closing process is performed for this purpose (S103). That is, the big winning opening 65a is opened every round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a has passed or whether a predetermined number of balls have won the big winning opening 65a. When either of these conditions is satisfied, the special winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the special winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

  Next, display control processing of the second symbol (for example, “◯” or “x” symbol) by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 is acquired at the timing of the passage, and the second symbol display device 83 changes the second symbol. Display is implemented. Then, a lottery of the second symbol is performed based on the value of the second random number counter C4, and when the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the electric accessory attached to the second starting port 64b is released for a predetermined time.

  Next, switch reading processing is executed (S106). That is, the state of the various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, based on the winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the stop-type counter CS1, and the second per-random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and their counter values are the maximum values. (In this embodiment, when reaching 899, 99, 99, 198, and 250, respectively), each is cleared to 0. Further, when the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the first per-random number counter C1 or The initial value of the second per-random number counter C2 is read, and the initial value is set in the first per-random number counter C1 or the second per-random number counter C2. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first start port 64a. Then, a start winning process associated with winning in any one of the second start ports 64b is executed (S110). Details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the start winning process is executed, the firing control process is executed (S111), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. When the ball launch is on, information on the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the work RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. Thereby, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

  Further, the other process (S112) includes a process of determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball launched into the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or more even though the information of the ball launch signal is set in the processing of S111. If not, it is determined that there is a possibility of a ball clogging and that it is in an error state. If a payout abnormality signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the ball payout is in an error state. Furthermore, even when a large vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 10 or when it is determined that a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed in the game and that the game is in an error state. .

  Whether the pachinko machine 10 is subjected to a large vibration is determined by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a vibration detection sensor for detecting vibration, and the output of the vibration detection sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 201. This is done by reading the output of the vibration sensor in the process of S112. In addition, whether or not a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10 is determined by providing a magnetic sensor for detecting a change in magnetism in the pachinko machine 10, and the output of the magnetic sensor is input to the input / output port 205 of the main controller 201. This is done by reading the output of the magnetic sensor in the process of S112.

  If it is determined in step S112 that an error state has occurred, an error command including information related to the error type is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. Thereby, an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 112 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the audio output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be turned on and blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .

  Next, a switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the switch reading process (S106).

  In the switch reading process, first, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208f, and the out switch 208g are switched. The output is read by referring to the first port 205a, first port 205b, first port 205c, second port 205c, second port 205d, big prize port 205e and out port 205f of the input / output port 205, and the first start port 64a, It is determined whether there is a winning at the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning port 63a, the second ordinary winning port 63b, the first winning port 65a, and the presence or absence of the ball guided to the ball discharge path, and the detection information ( (Winning detection information) is stored (S151). The determination of the winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharging path is performed over three timer interruption processes based on the outputs of the switches 208a to 208f.

  Next, based on the winning detection information, among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning port 63a, the second ordinary winning port 63b, and the first winning port 65a, there is a winning through the process of S151. If there is a determined winning hole, the number corresponding to the number of winning balls is determined so that the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning hole where the winning has been won (that is, the number specified by the winning ball number table 202e) is paid out. The winning ball command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  Then, based on the winning detection information, among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the first winning port 65a, there is a winning through the process of S151. If there is a determined winning opening, one of the first 1 counter 203d, first 2 counter 203e, ordinary 1 counter 203f, ordinary 2 counter 203g, and large winning opening counter 203h is set to 1 corresponding to the winning winning opening. In addition to counting up, if it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, the out counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S153).

  Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the winning information (values of the counters 203d to i and information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10) is set in the last prize ratio management chip 207 ( S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not elapsed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that 0.5 seconds have elapsed (S154: Yes), the processing of S155 to S157 is executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the first counter 203d, the first two counter 203e, the first counter 203f, the second counter 203g and the big prize counter 203h are used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information. Together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, it is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 a (S 155).

  As a result, the value of the start 1 counter 203d is set in the start 1 buffer 262a of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the value of the start 2 counter 203e is set in the start 2 buffer 262b of the accessory ratio management chip 207. The value of 203f is set in the common 1 buffer 262c of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the value of the ordinary 2 counter 203g is set in the universal 1 buffer 262d of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the value of the big prize opening counter 203h is used. The big prize opening buffer 262e of the property ratio management chip 207 is set, and the value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  As described above, the counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i is continuously performed for 0.5 seconds. When 0.5 seconds have elapsed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are used as winning information, and the values of the out counter 203i are counted. Is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 together with information indicating the gaming state at that time. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening every 0.5 seconds, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharging path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game is counted, and the counted result is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Then, as will be described later, the accessory ratio management chip 207 accumulates the counted values for each value until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio, so that it is not until the power is turned on. The number of balls won in each prize opening until the timing for calculating the object ratio, or until the next timing for calculating the object ratio after calculating the last object ratio It counts every time and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game).

  Temporarily, the MPU 201 does not count the number of balls won in each winning slot for each winning slot or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If these counts are performed only by the accessory ratio management chip 207, the winning ratio at each winning opening or the ball guided to the ball discharge path is also short at intervals (for example, every 2 milliseconds) even with the accessory ratio management chip 207. Must be monitored, processing load increases and power consumption may increase.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, these count results are set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds by the count of the MPU 201. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, every 0.5 seconds. In addition, each prize is received after the power is turned on until it is the first time to calculate an accessory ratio, or until the next timing to calculate an accessory ratio after calculating the last accessory ratio. The number of balls won in the mouth may be counted for each winning mouth, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, increase in processing load and power consumption in the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening for each winning opening, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, at each 2 millisecond interval when the timer interrupt process is executed, winnings at each winning mouth and balls guided to the ball discharge path are monitored. This is necessary for main control of the game such as award ball determination, and the processing is originally performed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10, since the firing interval of the balls launched into the game area by the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is about 0.6 seconds, each winning opening counted at 0.5 second intervals is used. The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) are almost 0 or 1 and at most several. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 can be suppressed by this counting process. Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won in each winning opening in 0.5 seconds for each winning opening, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls used in the game). Even if the process of counting the number of () is performed, there is no significant effect.

  The gaming state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, during a big hit, during opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and during an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened is determined by the MPU 201 confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g with reference to the door opening port 205g.

  Whether or not the gaming state is in error is based on the result determined by the process of S112 of the timer interrupt process. In the process of S155, when it is determined that there is an error state in the process of S112, information indicating that there is an error as a gaming state is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  If the game state set by the processing of S155 includes a big hit, the jackpot information is stored in the big hit buffer 262g. If the game state includes that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open, the game state is released. When the door opening information is stored in the middle buffer 262h, and the gaming state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, these pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information regarding the gaming state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the information regarding the accessory ratio. Therefore, the inspection apparatus 300 searches for the cause by referring to the information indicating the gaming state when an incomprehensible tendency is recognized in the accessory ratio while analyzing the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10. Can do.

  After the process of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S156). The accessory ratio management chip 207 executes setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, based on the interrupt signal, and a ball won for each winning slot based on various information set in the buffer 262. And the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls launched into the game area) are stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine Information regarding the ten game states is also stored in the first reading memory 263.

  After the process of S156, the first counter 203d, first two counter 203e, first counter 203f, second counter 203g, second counter 203g, special winning counter 203h corresponding to each winning opening, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are set to 0. (S157), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the process of S157, the number of balls won in each winning port in the next 0.5 second is again counted for each winning port by the counters 203d to 203h. In addition, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out counter 203i.

  In the processing of S154, when this processing is executed for the first time after power is supplied to the main control device 110, the winning information (the values of the counters 203d to 203i and the pachinko machine) It is considered that 0.5 seconds have passed since the setting of 10 game state information) (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the number of balls won at each winning opening detected before the power is turned off or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, which is set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The values of the counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203 that have not been set can be set in the accessory ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied on condition that the values are held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress the omission of record of winning information and out information due to power interruption.

  Next, the start winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S110). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball (start winning) at one of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. If there is a start win, each counter C1 to C3 A process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of balls to be held to the sound lamp controller 113 is executed.

  When executing the start winning process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won (start winning) in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (S201). Here, the first start port switch 208a that detects a winning to the first starting port 64a and the second start that detects a winning to the second starting port 64b by the process of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11). The result of the presence / absence of winning in the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b determined based on the output signal from the mouth switch 208b is used.

  If it is determined that the ball has won the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (the start has been won) (S201: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (held by the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls N of the fluctuating effect is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is no winning in any of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. If the number N of activated balls is not less than 4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b (S201: Yes) and the number of reserved balls N <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (hold) 1 is added to the number N of balls (S203). Then, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first per-random number counter storage area 203b1, the first per-type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter 203b3, and the area corresponding to the value indicated by the retained ball number counter 203a, Each change type is stored (stored) in the storage area 203b4 (S204).

  Specifically, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after the addition in the process of S203 is “1”, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in the respective storage areas of the hold first area. Further, if the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “2”, each storage area of the reserved second area is stored. If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “3”, the retained third area If the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after the addition is “4” in each storage area, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are retained in each storage area of the retained fourth area.

  Next, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N) after the addition in the process of S203, the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b by the process of S204, A command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203 for transmitting the reserved ball number command including the values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113. The buffer is set (S205). Thereby, the reserved ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

  The voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command and instructs the display control device 114 to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number N in the reserved ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4). To do. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command to pre-read before the variation effect based on each value is executed. It is judged before execution of the variation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what the variation time will be, etc.). The execution of various effects can be determined based on the determination result based on the prefetching.

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be included in the reserved ball number command in the process of S205 may be the values read from the counter buffer by the process of S204, or the reserved ball storage area in the process of S204. You may use what read the value stored (suspended) in 203b.

  When the process of S205 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the fluctuation process (S109) which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing this variation processing (S109). The variation process (S109) controls variation display on the first symbol display device 37 and variation effect performed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is currently being made (S301). The jackpot includes the jackpot game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 in the jackpot and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if it is a big hit (S301: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing. Next, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not elapsed after the fluctuation stop (S303: No), this processing is terminated as it is. Thereby, since the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

  On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if the predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the fluctuation (S303: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) It is determined whether or not is larger than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, and first, the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the held ball number) 1 is subtracted from the number N of balls (S305). This is because the number of reserved balls decreases by one because the execution of one variation effect among the variation effects that have been suspended is started by the variation start process (S307).

  Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the reserved first to fourth areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted, such as area 203c, hold second area → hold first area, hold third area → hold second area, hold fourth area → hold third area.

  After the data shift process of S306, the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the holding ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process. The variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S304, if it is determined that the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is 0 (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not a demonstration is in progress (S308). In this determination process, after a demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (the number of retained balls N) is determined to be greater than zero. It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

  If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S309: Yes), the process directly returns to the timer interrupt process. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S101 in FIG. 14) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next, It is transmitted toward the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, as described above, the demo command is set when there is no holding ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the change display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the stop of the change, a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after stopping the fluctuation is further performed. When the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the change and stopping, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demo command. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the change stop, the stop effect of the stop change effect can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration effect.

  In the process of S302, if it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether the change time has passed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S311), and it returns to a timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And a display mode for turning on the red LED is set.

  The variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S310: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbol is set in advance by a variation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big hit is determined according to the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306, and if the big hit, the first hit type counter C2 Depending on the value of the value, it will be a 15R probability variation jackpot after the jackpot (the maximum number of rounds is a probability variation jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a big round of 15 rounds), or a 2R probability variation jackpot (the maximum number of rounds will be a high probability state after a jackpot of two rounds) It is determined whether the symbol will be a transition jackpot or a symbol that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot that transitions to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds is a jackpot of 15 rounds).

  In the present embodiment, a blue LED is lit when the 15R probability variable big hit is reached after the big hit, a red LED is turned on when the 2R probability variable big hit is reached, and the red LED and the blue LED are turned on when the 15R normal big hit is reached. Turn on the LED. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Note that each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 and to confirm and display the stop symbol. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the fluctuation start process (S307) which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the change start process (S307). This variation start process (S307) performs lottery (big hit lottery) of “big hit” or “out” based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, and the first symbol display device 37. And the production pattern (fluctuation pattern) etc. of the fluctuating effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

  In the variation start process, first, the jackpot for determining whether or not the jackpot is based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 8A). A lottery (win / no decision) process is performed (S401).

  Whether or not it is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the gaming state (mode) that can be taken by the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state, “7,307,582” is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is a high probability state, “28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892 ”are defined as jackpot random numbers.

  In the process of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number values defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In the case, it is determined that the jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that the game is a big hit (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit type table 202b (FIG. 8B) Display mode is set based on (see S402).

  In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the holding ball execution area 203c, that is, the high probability state after the jackpot of the maximum round number of 15 rounds by the jackpot type table 202b. 15R probable big jackpot that makes a transition to 15R, a big round 15R jackpot that hits a low probability state after 15 rounds, or a 2R probable big jackpot that makes the maximum number of rounds go to a high probability state after a big round of two rounds Determined. Based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

  Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type, the jackpot type (15R probability variation jackpot, 2R probability variation jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) is set as the stop type as it is. The display mode at the time of big hit in the 3 symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, a variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until the display is stopped in the display mode at the time of big hit is determined. In the determination of the variation pattern at the time of jackpot, first, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8C) to be used is selected according to the number of balls held at that time indicated by the number of reserved balls 203a. If the 15R probability variation jackpot or 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, it is stored in the holding ball execution area 203c in the “15R jackpot common” group of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, any one of the variation A, the variation B, and the variation C is selected.

  If 2R probability variation jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the “2R probability variation jackpot dedicated” group of the selected variation pattern table 202d1 for jackpot A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In this embodiment, in this case, only the 2R variation is selected. The relationship between the variation pattern (variation A, variation B, variation C, 2R variation) and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of disconnection is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third mode is set based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c. As a stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, one of front / rear detach reach, reach other than front / rear detach, and complete detach is set. In the present embodiment, as described above, the range of the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state. The tables are set differently.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display with the off symbol is determined. At this time, if the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal low probability state excluding the short-time state, a variation pattern table for detachment (normal) corresponding to the number of held balls at that time indicated by the held ball number counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 8D) is selected. Further, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short-time state or the high probability state at the time of probability change, the deviation (probability change) variation pattern table 202d3 (corresponding to the number of balls held at that time indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a) (See FIG. 8E).

  Then, when complete outage is set as the stop type in the process of S404, in the “completely exclusive” group of the selected out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, there is a hold. A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the sphere execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, the variation D or the variation E is selected.

  In addition, when the front / rear out of reach and the reach other than out of front / rear are set as the stop type in the process of S402, “reach common” of the selected out (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or out (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3. In this group, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the process of S406, based on the change pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405, a change pattern command for notifying the display control apparatus 114 of the change pattern via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the audio lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the variation processing. These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based on the command and transmits them to the display control device 114.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S601). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S604). If it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S614 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S614.

  Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S615, S616) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Accordingly, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S615, S616) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). . In the RAM initialization process (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then an initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), the information on the occurrence of power interruption is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is shut off is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S610, an initialization signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S610). As a result, the accessory ratio management chip 207 receives the initialization signal, and executes initial setting processing such as initializing the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 to 0 (S711 in FIG. 18). Initialization is performed so that the accessory ratio management chip 207a can manage the accessory ratio.

  Next, the information of the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, in the prize ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize is awarded when each winning slot indicated by the prize ball number table 202e is won. Based on the number of balls, an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Here, the number of winning balls when there is a winning at each winning opening is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is conventionally stored in the ROM 202. The prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 as information on the number of prize balls is supplied every time power is supplied. By setting to 265a, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machine types are different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202. Even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used for different pachinko machines, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S612). Thereby, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b and the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is reached, the pachinko machine 10 The feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio are calculated.

  Here, the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the accessory ratio is physically limited in the storage capacity in which the information related to the accessory ratio can be recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Rather than fixing the timing, it is preferable to take into account the probability of jackpot and probability of change in the pachinko machine 10. Like the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the ratio of the accessory determined in consideration of the jackpot probability or the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202 and supplied with power. Each time the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the ROM 202 to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio management chip 207 has the timing corresponding to the jackpot probability or the probability variation ratio in the pachinko machine 10. The ratio and the continuous feature ratio can be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  After the processing of S612, an interrupt is permitted (S613). And it transfers to the main process mentioned later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing this main process. In the main process, a counter update process and a power-off process are executed roughly.

  In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S701: No), the power failure monitoring circuit 252 does not output the power failure signal SG1, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10) (S703), and the process proceeds to S701.

  Here, while the main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is started and executed at a predetermined time interval (2 milliseconds in the present embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the game state. For example, during the big hit, execution for controlling the opening / closing of the big winning opening 65a is performed. If there is a passage of a ball to the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 performs display control of the second symbol. In the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random number values to be compared with the acquired first hit random number counter C1 depending on whether the probability state is high or low. Will be different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the game state. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, and changes according to the game state at that time.

  The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, so the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. . In particular, by updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at random, the first per-random number counter C1 and the second per-random number counter C2 that use these as initial values for updating are updated. Can be given randomness.

  In the processing of S701, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701: Yes), the power failure is caused by the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. This means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 15 has been executed, and therefore the process at the time of power-off after S704 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). The power-off information is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processing of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing ends. Thereby, in the main process of the main controller 110, various settings by the timer interrupt process are completed, and the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701 as in the case where the initialization process is initialized.

  Therefore, in the process at power-off, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the initial setting process (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S701. As a result, the control burden on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which processing to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing, and updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is performed in the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing in the main processing. You may comprise so that a part or all of the process currently performed by the timer interruption process may be performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in a main process. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the large opening opening / closing process (S103), the second symbol control process (S105), and the switch reading which were executed in the timer interruption process in this embodiment. A part or all of the process (S106) may be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

  In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed in the main process is provided, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, a process executed every predetermined time is executed. The updating of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be performed regardless of whether a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, the updating of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is executed during the remaining time of the process executed every predetermined time, but the process executed every predetermined time is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the above changes, each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the CPU 261 can be broadly divided into main parts ratio management main processing that is activated upon power-on, winning information is set from the MPU 201, and setting information is received based on the interrupt signal received from the MPU 201. There are a process and an inspection result output process executed based on the connection of the inspection apparatus 300 to the inspection terminal 207a.

  First, with reference to FIG. 18, the accessory ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing this accessory ratio management main process. This accessory ratio management main process is started when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  When the accessory ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal is not received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continued. If it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711, and initialization is performed (S711). Thus, the accessory ratio management chip 207 executes initialization of the accessory ratio management chip 207 after at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is completed and the control of the game by the MPU 201 can be started. Will do.

  In the initial setting in S711, when starting the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207, initialization necessary for each device in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is executed. For example, the buffer 262 and the first reading memory 263 are all initialized to 0. Thus, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, it is possible to suppress the meaningless data from remaining in the buffer, and the meaningless data is first read. Storage in the memory 263 can be prevented. In the first reading memory 263, the number of balls won in each winning opening and the ball discharge path are guided from the time power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 until the timing of calculating the accessory ratio. It is possible to accumulate and count the number of spheres (that is, the number of spheres launched into the game area), and to store information on the gaming state during that time.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the winning ball number table 202e is received from the MPU 201 (S712). And while not receiving (S712: No), the process of S712 is continued and performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it has been received (S712: Yes), the received prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, in the prize ratio management chip 207, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a, and each prize is awarded when each winning slot indicated by the prize ball number table 202e is won. Based on the number of balls, an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the trigger setting data 202f information is received from the MPU 201 (S714). And while not receiving (S714: No), the process of S714 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger setting data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. Thereby, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when it becomes the timing (trigger) to calculate the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the accessory ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and The continuous character ratio is calculated.

  Thus, only the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is turned on are the prize balls. The number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b are set. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a lie prize ball number table and trigger information data from being set for the prize ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b by an unauthorized person.

  Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 ends, interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, when an interrupt signal transmitted after the winning information is set from the MPU 201 is received, the setting information receiving process is executed, and this occurs based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a. The inspection result output process is executed by the interrupt signal.

  When interrupt signals are input simultaneously, the setting information reception process is executed with priority over the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and information regarding the gaming state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and then information such as the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when the interrupt signals are input simultaneously, the inspection result output process may be executed with priority over the inspection apparatus output process. In this case, when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information related to the accessory ratio and the like can be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

  Next, it is determined whether power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717). Unless power-off information is received (S717: No), S717 is continuously executed. In the meantime, if the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed in preference to the process of S717, and the interrupt generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a. If an error signal is received, an inspection result output process is executed.

  When power-off information is received as a result of the process of S717 (S717: Yes), the power to the main control device 110 (the accessory ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to a power failure or the like. Therefore, an accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, a setting information reception process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing this setting information reception processing. This setting information reception process is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information is set from the MPU 201.

  In the setting information reception process, the winning information set in the buffers 262a to 262e by the MPU 201 (each value of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 2 counter 203g, and the big prize opening counter 203h) and This is a process of storing the out information (the value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i in the first reading memory 263. In addition, when it is the calculation timing of the bonus rate, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated based on the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263, and data relating to the number of shot balls and the game state is calculated. In addition, a process of recording in the second storage memory 264 is also performed.

  First, refer to FIG. In the setting information reception process, first, it is determined whether there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720). When there is door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: Yes), the door opening information is set (added and stored) in the opening data 263h together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 ( S721).

  If it is determined by the processing in S720 that there is no door opening information in the opening buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the processing in S721, whether there is error information in the error buffer 262i. Is determined (S722). When there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). .

  If it is determined by the processing of S722 that there is no in-error information in the in-error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the processing of S723, then the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is midnight (midnight 0 It is determined whether it is between 6:00 and 6:00 in the early morning (S724). Normally, since midnight hours are outside business hours, an interrupt signal is transmitted from the MPU 201 during this midnight hours and this setting information reception process is executed. It is thought that it was broken. Therefore, if it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is a midnight time zone (S724: Yes), in order to keep a record to that effect, the overtime information is indicated in the overtime data 264j by the current time indicated by the RTC 266. It is set (added and stored) together with the time (S725).

  When it is determined by the processing of S724 that it is not the midnight time zone (S724: No), and after the processing of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is jackpot information in the jackpot medium buffer 262g (S726). When the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (added and stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

  When it is determined by the processing of S726 that there is no jackpot information in the jackpot medium buffer 262g (S726: No), and after the processing of S727, the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to the winning ports and the out switch 208f are set. These values are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first reading memory 263, respectively (S728).

  Specifically, the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first start port 64a (that is, the number of balls won in the first start port 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start port 64b (that is, the number of balls won in the second start port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second start port 64b is accumulated in the start 2 counter 263b.

  The value set in the ordinary 1 buffer 262a corresponding to the first ordinary winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the ordinary 1 counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a is accumulated in the ordinary 1 counter 263a. The value set in the ordinary 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second ordinary winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the ordinary 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b is accumulated in the second counter 263b. The value set in the big prize opening buffer 262e corresponding to the big prize opening 65a (that is, the number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big prize opening counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls that have won the special prize opening 65a is accumulated in the special prize counter 263e.

  The counters 263a to 264f and the data 263g to 264j of the first reading memory 263 indicate an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and an accessory ratio. It is initialized to 0 in later-described S744 (see FIG. 21) which is executed when the timing for calculation is reached. As a result, the first reading memory 263 temporarily stores the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 again while accumulating until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio. .

  Subsequently, the setting information winning process will be described with reference to FIG. After the process of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the ratio of the accessory indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “number of shots” (S729: “number of shots”), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, game) It is determined whether or not the number of balls launched into the area is equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of balls” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). If the value of the out counter 263f is equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of balls” (S730: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , The process proceeds to S734. Details of the accessory ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when the value of the out counter 263f is not equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of balls” (S730: No), the process proceeds to S734 as it is.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio by the number of shot balls, it is possible to always calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio while a predetermined sphere is fired. Therefore, since many spheres can win the various winning holes and calculate the ratios and consecutive ratios at the stage where the winning spheres are made, calculate the averaged ratios and continuous ratios. it can. Accordingly, since fluctuations in the ratio of the actors and the consecutive actors in a short time in a normal game can be eliminated, the fraudulent analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more easily.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “time” (S729: “time”), the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is Then, it is determined whether or not the “predetermined time” (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, “arrived” includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 coincides with the “predetermined time” but also the case where the “predetermined time” has passed for the first time.

  If it is determined by the processing of S731 that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the “predetermined time” (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the accessory ratio. Then, an accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, when the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process proceeds to S734 as it is.

  By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the proportion of the object according to the current time, even if the game is not so much played in the pachinko machine 10, it is ensured by the arrival of the predetermined time that the property ratio In addition, the continuous character ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the inspection apparatus 300 to reliably analyze the presence / absence of fraud based on the reliably calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio.

  In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “game time” (S729: “game time”), the player uses the pachinko machine 10. It is determined whether the accumulated time (game time) in which the game has been performed is equal to or greater than the “predetermined time” included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

  Here, the game time can be calculated, for example, by the following method. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first reading memory 263. As with other counters and data stored in the first reading memory 263, the game time counter is a normal initial setting process that is executed when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (see FIG. 18). ) And S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, which is executed when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, is initialized to zero. Then, in the setting information reception process, the value of the out buffer 262f is confirmed, and when a value of 1 or more is set, a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, a ball is in the game area. Since it means that it has been fired, the game time counter is counted up by one. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

  If it is determined that the game time is equal to or longer than the “predetermined time” by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, and the accessory ratio calculation process is executed. (S733), the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, when the game time is less than the “predetermined time” (S731: No), the process proceeds to S734 as it is.

  The bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are originally calculated by performing a test firing test of a game ball for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio according to the game time, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio close to the original definition can be calculated by the accessory ratio management chip. The analysis can be performed by using the feature ratio and the continuous feature ratio close to the original definition.

  In the process of S734, all the buffers 262 are initialized to 0 (S734). Thereby, even when there is a buffer that is not set for each of the buffers 262a to 262i in the setting of winning information, out information, and game information from the next MPU 201, it is possible to suppress that meaningless data remains in the buffer, The meaningless data can be prevented from being stored in the first reading memory 263. After the process of S734, the setting information reception process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21, the accessory ratio calculation processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the accessory ratio calculation process. The accessory ratio calculation process is a process of calculating an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio from information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording the same in the second reading memory 264, and the timing for calculating the accessory ratio ( (Trigger) (see FIG. 20), and also executed when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18).

  In the accessory ratio calculation process, first, an accessory ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 262, and added to the accessory ratio data 264a together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. (S740). Next, the continuous character ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 262, and is added to the continuous character ratio data 264b and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741). ).

  The bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls won at the first start port 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls won at the second start port 64b indicated by the first counter 263b. The number of balls won at the first ordinary winning opening 63a indicated by the ordinary 1 counter 263c, the number of balls won at the second ordinary winning opening 63b indicated by the ordinary 2 counter 263d, and the big winning counter 263e. The prizes associated with each winning mouth shown in the winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a with respect to each of the number of balls won in the big winning hole 65a. Multiplying the number of balls, the number of balls paid out for winning in each winning port is calculated for each winning port. Then, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated by summing them.

  Then, with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the number of balls paid out with winning in the second starting port 64b and the number of balls paid out with winning in the big winning port 65a An accessory ratio is calculated by calculating a total ratio with the number. In addition, the ratio of consecutive characters is calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out as a result of winning the prize winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

  Originally, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are the above-mentioned rates when the trial test of a game ball is performed for 10 hours. In this embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b. At each timing (trigger) for calculating the ratio of the accessory indicated by 202f, the player is informed until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out, the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out for winning at the second starting port 64a and the big winning port 65a is calculated as an accessory ratio. Then, it is recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing, The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in accordance with winning in the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous character ratio, and is recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

  In addition, even when the power is turned off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to pay out while it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) for calculating the latest accessory ratio. Based on the number of spheres (prize balls), the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate are calculated and recorded in the bonus rate data 264a or the continuous bonus rate data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate can be used without omission for the number of prize balls that are paid out before the power is turned off. The ratio can be calculated.

  Next, the value of the out counter 263f indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is added to the shot ball number data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). Further, the jackpot data 263g, the opening data 263h, the error data 263i, the various jackpot information stored in the after hours data 263j, the door opening information, the errors information, and the after hours information are associated with each information. The time (the time at which the information is stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from the oldest time information, and added to the gaming state data 264d and recorded (S743).

  In the process of S743, for example, when the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot medium data 263g at intervals of less than 1 second, it means that the jackpot is continuously generated as the gaming state, so the oldest time Only the jackpot information and the time are recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Similarly, when the door opening information, the error information, and the out-of-hour information are stored in the data 263h to j at intervals of less than one second, respectively, the oldest time information and the time Only in the game state data 264d. Thereby, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be kept small.

  As described above, when the winning combination ratio management chip 207 receives the winning information, the out information, and the information regarding the gaming state from the MPU 201, the first reading memory 263 accumulates and temporarily stores the information, Every time it becomes the timing (trigger) to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. As a result, the accessory ratio and the like can be managed with a small storage capacity, and information relating to the accessory ratio and the like can be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

  In addition, the second reading memory 264 also stores the time at which they are recorded in the second reading memory 264 with respect to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, not only the ratio of the bonuses and the consecutive bonuses, but also information indicating the total number of balls launched into the game area, and the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. In addition, information relating to the gaming state (hit information, door opening information, error information, and overtime information) is recorded together with the time when each information is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the second reading memory H.264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the inspection apparatus 300, when there is a large change in the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio, the changed accessory ratio or the consecutive accessory ratio is the first. 2. By analyzing the total number of balls launched into the game area and the game state around the time recorded in the reading memory 264, the cause of the change in the ratio of the bonuses or the continuous bonuses can be found.

  Here, information relating to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls fired to the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the shot ball number data 264c are respectively a predetermined number ( For example, it is limited to 1024). Further, the total number of hit information, door opening information, in-error information, and out-of-hour information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). When a predetermined number of information has already been recorded in the combination ratio data 264a, continuous combination ratio data 264b, number of shot balls 264c or game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the latest information is stored there. Is recorded.

  Specifically, the consecutive character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c and the game state data 264d are each configured by a ring buffer, and each has a memory for managing a position where information is written on the ring buffer. Every time information is written, the writing position is shifted by 1, so that the process of deleting the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized.

  As described above, by setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each data, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit number, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection apparatus 300 including the latest pachinko machine 10 state is analyzed. Can be done.

  After the process of S743, the first reading memory 263 is initialized to all 0 (S744). As a result, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while accumulating again until the next timing of calculating the accessory ratio by the first reading memory 263. .

  When the process of S744 ends, the accessory ratio calculation process ends.

  Next, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output processing. This inspection result output processing is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when a cable connector for connecting the inspection apparatus 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output process is executed, first, all the accessory ratios recorded in the accessory ratio data 264a and the accessory ratios associated with each accessory ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The recorded time is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the ratio of the oldest recording time (S751).

  Specifically, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 first writes the information of the accessory ratio in the accessory ratio data 264a. Information on the proportions recorded from the recorded location to the location indicated in the memory for managing the location where the information is written (that is, the location where the information on the proportion of the latest feature is recorded). The data are sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the accessory ratio data 264a, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, The position where the information is written is shifted in order starting from the position at which the information on the ratio of the oldest item is recorded, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position at the latest time). The information recorded up to the position where the object ratio information is recorded is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, the information on the ratio of the objects is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest time information.

  Next, all the consecutive character ratios recorded in the continuous character ratio data 264b and the times at which the consecutive character ratios associated with the respective consecutive character ratios are recorded in the second reading memory 264 are obtained. Then, the recorded time is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest proportion (S752).

  Specifically, in the continuous character ratio data 264b, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded is not satisfied, the CPU 261 first stores information on the continuous character ratio in the continuous character ratio data 264b. Is recorded from the position where the information is written to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information of the continuous character ratio at the latest time is recorded). Information on the object ratio is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, in the continuous character ratio data 264b, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, The position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written by shifting the reading position one by one in order from the position at which the information on the ratio of the continuous feature at the oldest time is recorded) (ie, the latest time) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the continuous character ratio is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, the information on the continuous feature ratio is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information on the oldest time.

  Next, information on the number of balls fired to all game areas (number of fired balls) recorded in the shot ball number data 264c, and information on the number of shot balls associated with the information on each number of shot balls The time recorded in the 2 reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the ratio of the oldest recording time (S753).

  Specifically, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the shot ball number data 264c, the CPU 261 first writes information on the number of shot balls into the shot ball number data 264c. Information on the number of shot balls recorded from the recorded position to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where information is written (that is, the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the latest time is recorded). The data are sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, in the shot ball number data 264c, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, The position where the information is written is shifted one by one in order from the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the oldest time is recorded), and the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the launch at the latest time) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the number of balls is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information on the old time.

  Next, all jackpot information recorded in the game state data 264d, door opening information, error information, and out-of-hours information, and the time at which the information associated with each information is stored in the first reading memory 263 Are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the information with the oldest time (S754).

  Specifically, in the gaming state data 264d, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded is not satisfied, the CPU 261 starts from the position where the information is first written in the gaming state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory for managing the position where writing is performed (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied in the gaming state data 264d, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the most The position where the information is written is shifted one by one in order from the position where the information on the old time is recorded, and the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) ) Are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As described above, in the gaming state data 264d, information regarding the gaming state is arranged (sorted) from the information of the old time and recorded in the gaming state data 264d. Therefore, information regarding the gaming state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

  Since each information is output in order from the oldest time by the processing of S751 to S754, the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each information in the output order, and thereby, the ratio of the objects with the passage of time, It is possible to easily analyze the change in the ratio of the continuous character, the number of shot balls and the game state.

  After the process of S754, the inspection result output process ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio are calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207. And record. When the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection apparatus 300.

  Here, among the cheating agents, the second starting port 64b can be obtained by illegally opening the electric member of the second starting port 64b by some method or guiding the ball to the second starting port 64b. Some are trying to increase the chances of winning big hits. Also, there are some that try to obtain a lot of prize balls by opening the open / close plate of the big prize opening 65a illegally by some method or guiding the ball to the big prize opening 65a. In the case of such an illegal act, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the consecutive accessory are increased.

  On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the fraudulent act is performed when the fraudulent act is performed by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous feature ratio in the inspection apparatus 300. Can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information relating to the number of balls launched into the game area and information relating to the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, when the ratio of the bonuses and the consecutive bonuses is high as a result of the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot into the gaming area and the information on the gaming state. be able to.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 and is housed in one substrate box 100 together with the MPU 201, the ROM 202, and the like. As a result, it is difficult for the fraudster to modify the winning information and the like input to the accessory ratio management chip 207. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high reliability with respect to the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate calculated and output by the bonus rate management chip 207.

  In addition, since the MPU 201 is not provided with the management of the ratio of the actors and the like, the dedicated accessory ratio management chip 207 for managing the ratio of the actors and the like is provided. MPU 201 can be devoted to precise control.

  In addition, the prize ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when the power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Then, the winning combination ratio management chip 207 calculates the winning combination ratio and the consecutive winning combination ratio using the winning ball number data 202e set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a. Thereby, it is not necessary to store information on the number of prize balls different for each model in the ROM of the accessory ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machine models are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the same accessory ratio management chip 207 is used for pachinko machines of different models, the accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

  Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-up processing in S915 is performed according to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power outage”) (see FIG. 24). ) Is determined during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), it executes the power-off process in S915. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S915 is in progress can be determined based on the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S802: No), the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off process in S915 is performed. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), the process proceeds to S804, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S915, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S915, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S804 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S804, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S806). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the reading / writing check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the process of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S915 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S809), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S808 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down, so that the process of S808 through S804 to S806 is performed. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), S809, which is the work area clear process of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S810, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S810), and interrupt permission is set. In step S811, the process proceeds to the main process.

  Note that the reason for skipping the clear process in S809 is that if the process from S804 to S808 is reached via the process in S806, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S804. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  Next, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous execution of the process of S901 (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S901: No). , The process proceeds to S910 without performing the processes in S902 to S908. In the process of S901, it is determined whether 1 millisecond has elapsed or not. In S902 to S908, it is not necessary to process in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas in S910, the variable display process This is because the command determination process in step S911 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S911 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S910 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  In the process of S901, when it is determined that one millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S901 was executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds to S902 as it is.

  In the process of S902, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S902). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S906 described later are set (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  Next, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S905). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. In this process, when an operation by the player on the frame button 22 is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

  Further, when the frame effect is not executed or when the frame button 22 is pressed during the high-speed variation period, a process for changing the stage is performed, and the rear image change for the display control device 114 is performed instead of the frame button operation command. Set the command. By including information on the type of the back image corresponding to the stage after the change in the back image change command, the display control device 114 displays the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as an image corresponding to the stage. Processing to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of fluctuation display, the expected value of the jackpot due to the current fluctuation is displayed by pressing the frame button 22, or the expectation for the jackpot is displayed by pressing the frame button 22 during reach production. It is good also as a decision button for changing to the production | presentation which can have, or selecting the reach | reduction effect of the frame button 22 among several reach productions. If the frame button 22 is not provided, the process of S905 is omitted.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process (S905) ends, the lamp editing process is then executed (S906), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S907, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process in S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process in S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81. Executed in time. After the process of S908, the process proceeds to S910.

  In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a display variation pattern command is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is displayed on the display control device 114. A variable display process, which is a process set for transmission, is executed. Details of this variation display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 (S911). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S912). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power interruption processing is executed (S915). After executing the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S916), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the subsequent processing.

  Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S911). This command determination processing (S911) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. Is determined (S1001). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern in the variation display processing (see FIG. 26) described later. Used when setting.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1003). If it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

  The stop type command indicates the stop type of the variation effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the variation pattern command when the variation effect is started. This command is always transmitted from 110. By setting the variation start flag to ON by the processing of S1005, in the variation display processing executed later, based on the variation pattern extracted from the variation pattern command received earlier and the stop type extracted from the stop type command Then, a process for generating a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types, and transmitting them to the display control device 114 is executed.

  If it is determined that the stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1003 (S1003: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1006). If it is determined that the held ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the held ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the held ball number command (that is, the hold of the suspended variation effect). The number of spheres) is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1007).

  Here, the held ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins a prize (start prize) in either the first start slot 64a or the second start slot 64b. Every time, the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the number of reserved balls 203 a of the main control device 110 by the processing of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the number of held balls of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the number of held balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the ball of holding of the voice lamp control device 113 is detected when a start winning is detected. The value of the number counter 223a can be corrected to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

  Next, each value of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received reserved ball number command is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

  The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the held ball number command are acquired from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) at the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. It has been done. The sound lamp control device 113 can execute the prefetching process by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223. That is, when the suspended variation effect is executed, the result of the variation effect will be determined (whether it will be a big hit, the change time, etc.) before executing the variation effect, Execution of various effects can be determined.

  Next, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the number of held balls stored in the RAM 223 by the process of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display reserved ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, a process is performed so that the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may display the number of reserved balls according to the number of reserved balls.

  As a result of the processing of S1006, when it is determined that a pending ball number command has not been received (S1006: No), it is then determined whether or not a confirmed command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the display control device 114 of reception of the confirmation command is set (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. . The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223 and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 receives the display confirmation command to stop the variation effect being executed in the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type previously indicated by the display stop type command. By displaying the stop symbol, the display is confirmed.

  If it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1010 (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed. (S1012), the process proceeds to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114. The demo command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1013, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then command output processing of the main processing (S902). ) To the display control device 114.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the fluctuation display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display process (S910).

  This variation display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as described above. To generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110, and to send these commands to the display control device 114. It is processing to do.

  In the variation display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation start flag provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S1101: No), the stop type command is not received from the main control device 110, so this fluctuation display processing is performed. End and return to the main process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the variation start flag is turned off (S1102), and the command is extracted from the variation pattern command in S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25). A variation pattern in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The variation pattern extracted here is the variation time. In the audio lamp control device 113, a plurality of detailed variation patterns are prepared for each variation time, and one detailed variation is selected from the plurality of detailed variation patterns prepared for the extracted variation pattern (variation time). A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the display controller 113 of the determined detailed variation pattern is set (S1104).

  The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. By receiving the display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 performs the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 with the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Then, display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 113 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The display stop type command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The display control device 114 sets a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1105 is confirmed and displayed. To do.

  Next, in accordance with the setting of the display variation pattern command, the value of the number of retained balls in the RAM 223 is decreased by 1 in accordance with the consumption of the retained ball (that is, the variation display corresponding to the retained ball is set). (S1107), a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated value of the number of held balls is set (S1108). Then, the process returns to the main process.

  The display reserved ball number command set by the process of S1108 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (S902) of the main process. The The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the display reserved ball number command. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of balls held by counting the number of reserved balls displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 236. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is started when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

  When the power is turned on and the main process is executed by the MPU 231, first, an initial setting process is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, the MPU 231 is initialized, and the process of clearing the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. The compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and the decompressed character information is stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234. The extracted character information is written in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, other settings necessary for initialization are performed.

  When the initial setting process is completed, interrupt permission is then set (S1402). Thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27B is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by a command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27C, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27C is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. And instructing the display to the image controller 236.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when a V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 236 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image when the image drawing process or the display process has not been completed. It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27C, first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed. In this command determination process (S1602), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interruption process are analyzed, and the process according to the command is executed. For example, when a display variation pattern command is stored, image rendering is performed so that a variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 by the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. And start controlling the display.

  When the display stop type command is stored, the high speed change is performed so that the change effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 is stopped and displayed with the stop symbol indicated by the display stop type command ( While the variable display of the third symbol is performed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be recognized by the player), the displayed third symbol is replaced. When the display confirmation command is stored, the drawing and display of the image are controlled so that the confirmation display is performed in the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the command determination process (S1602), all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at a time, the variation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 and other effect modes can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode. The image drawing can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the command determination process (S1602) ends, the display setting process (S1603) is then executed. In the display setting process (S1603), one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602) or the like. The contents of the image are specifically specified.

  After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, a task process is then executed (S1064). In this task process, the characters (sprites, display objects) constituting the image are specified based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting process (S1603). In addition to specifying the type, various parameters necessary for drawing, such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle, are determined for each character (sprite).

  Then, a drawing process is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of characters constituting one frame and parameters necessary for drawing each character determined in the task process (S1503) are transmitted to the image controller 236. As a result, the image controller 236 executes image drawing processing according to these pieces of information, and displays the image drawn according to the information received 1V before on the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. Control for transmitting the image data to the third symbol display device 81 is performed.

  Thereafter, other necessary processing, for example, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S1505), and then the V interrupt processing is terminated.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main controller 110 is provided with the accessory ratio management chip 207, winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 is used. Calculate and record the property ratio and continuous feature ratio. When the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection apparatus 300.

  Here, among the cheating agents, the second starting port 64b can be obtained by illegally opening the electric member of the second starting port 64b by some method or guiding the ball to the second starting port 64b. Some are trying to increase the chances of winning big hits. Also, there are some that try to obtain a lot of prize balls by opening the open / close plate of the big prize opening 65a illegally by some method or guiding the ball to the big prize opening 65a. In the case of such an illegal act, the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the consecutive accessory are increased.

  On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the fraudulent act is performed when the fraudulent act is performed by analyzing the accessory ratio and the continuous feature ratio in the inspection apparatus 300. Can be found.

  In the pachinko machine 10, information relating to the number of balls launched into the game area and information relating to the game state are also recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, when the ratio of the bonuses and the consecutive bonuses is high as a result of the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot into the gaming area and the information on the gaming state. be able to.

  Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio are based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263. A case has been described in which is calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, each trigger recorded in the first reading memory 263 when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded as they are in the second reading memory 264, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second reading memory 264 are output as they are to the inspection device 300.

  Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment are assigned to the same configurations and processes as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 28 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the second embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in that in the second reading memory of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the accessory ratio data 264a of the first embodiment and the continuous The winning counter data 264e is recorded instead of the accessory ratio data 264b.

  In the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates a trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264. The meaning of the trigger information data 202f is only different from that of the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  That is, in the trigger information data 202f, the “number of firings”, “time”, “ Information indicating any of “game time” is defined.

  When information indicating the “number of shots” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating the “predetermined number of balls” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating “number of shots” and information indicating 500 balls as the “predetermined number of balls”, the first reading is performed every time the number of shot balls reaches 500. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When the information indicating “time” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating “predetermined time” that is the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. For example, when information indicating “time” and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 are defined as “predetermined time” in the trigger information data 202f, the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  When information indicating “game time” is specified, the trigger information data 202f also specifies information indicating “predetermined time”, which is a timing for calculating an accessory ratio. For example, when the trigger information data 202f includes information indicating “game time” and information indicating “2 hours” as “predetermined time”, the first reading memory 263 is stored every 2 hours of game time. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the second reading memory 264 are recorded.

  The winning counter data 264e is stored in the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 into the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64b counted in the first two counters 263b, and the first normal counted in the first counter 263c. The total number of balls won in the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls won in the second normal winning slot 63b counted by the second counter 263d, and the big winning opening 65a counted by the big prize counter 263e The total number of spheres recorded is the data recorded together with the time at the recording timing.

  The total number of balls won at each winning opening until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, or from the previous timing to the current timing, is the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning opening. Indicated by. When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 to the second reading memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. Is recorded in the winning counter data 264e.

  The winning counter data 264e is associated with one time, and the total number of balls won at the first starting port 64a at that time, the total number of balls won at the second starting port 64a, and the first ordinary winning port 63a won. The total number of balls, the total number of balls won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls won in the big winning opening 65a may be recorded.

  In addition, in the winning counter data 264e, an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64a, and a winning in the first ordinary winning port 63a. An area for recording the total number of balls won, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second normal prize opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a. When the value of each counter 263a to 263e stored in H.263 becomes the timing (trigger) to be recorded in the second reading memory 264, the total number of balls won in the corresponding winning opening for each area, The winning prize counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded together with the time at the timing.

  Here, the information related to the total number of balls won in each winning opening that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls won at the first starting port 64a at that time, the total number of balls won at the second starting port 64a, the total number of balls won at the first normal winning port 63a, In a case where the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b and the total number of balls won in the big winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of information is already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If it is, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e is configured as a ring buffer, a memory for managing the position where information is written is separately prepared on the ring buffer, and the position where writing is performed is shifted by one each time information is written. Thus, the process of deleting the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. In this way, by setting an upper limit on the number of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second reading memory 264. In addition, when the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. Analysis can be performed.

  In addition, an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64a, and the total number of balls won in the first normal winning port 63a are recorded. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a. Alternatively, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, and an upper limit may be set on the number of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. Thereby, when the information to be recorded reaches the upper limit number in each area, the oldest information is deleted and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection apparatus 300 including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10 is recorded. Analysis can be performed.

  When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt is generated to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 receives winning counter data 264e, a shot ball number memory 264c, and game state data recorded in the second reading memory 264. H.264d are sequentially transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 stores each information recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d (including recorded time information associated with each information). The data are read out in the recorded order and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

  Specifically, in the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 from now on, when the upper limit number of recordable information (the predetermined number) set for each is not satisfied, the CPU 261 first stores the information in the data. The information recorded from the position where the information is written to the position indicated in the memory for managing the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Transmit to device 300. On the other hand, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of recordable information (the above-mentioned predetermined number) determined for each, it is indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written. The position where the information is written is shifted by one by one from the position next to the recorded position (that is, the position where the information of the oldest time is recorded), and the position indicated by the memory managing the position where the information is written (that is, The information recorded up to the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information.

  In addition, an area for recording the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second starting port 64a, and the total number of balls won in the first normal winning port 63a are recorded. When the winning counter data 264e is configured by providing an area for storing, an area for storing the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls winning in the large winning opening 65a. By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls that have won a prize for each prize opening is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time. Become.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29, winning information storage processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the winning information storing process. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the accessory ratio is reached (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18). In the second embodiment, it is stored in the first reading memory 263. In the second embodiment, the character ratio calculation processing is performed to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the second reading memory 264 and record them in the second reading memory 264 (see FIG. 21). When the timing for recording each information in the second reading memory 264 is reached (trigger) (see FIG. 20), and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), the winning ratio is replaced with the winning ratio calculation process. Execute information storage processing. This winning information saving process is a process of recording each information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264.

  In the winning information saving process, first, the values of the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to the winning opening stored in the first reading memory 263 are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 to be stored in the second reading memory 264. It records in addition to the winning counter data 264e (S761). As a result, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, or from the previous timing, this time Until the timing of, the total number of balls won in the first starting port 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting port 64b counted by the first counter 263b. The total number of balls won, the total number of balls won in the first ordinary winning opening 63a counted by the ordinary 1 counter 263c, and the number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the ordinary 2 counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a counted by the big prize mouth counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.

  In addition, even when the power is turned off, it is determined that the power is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed on the second second reading memory 264 using the power charged in the capacitor 267. In addition, the total number of balls won at the first start port 64a counted by the first 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the total number of balls won at the second start port 64b counted by the first 2 counter 263b. And the total number of balls won in the first normal winning opening 63a counted by the first counter 263c, the total number of balls won in the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the second counter 263d, and the big prize The total number of balls won in the big prize opening 65a counted by the mouth counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, even if a winning is made to each winning opening that has been determined that the power is cut off from the timing (trigger) at which recording has been performed on the most recent second reading memory 264, the winning is not leaked. The total number of balls can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning opening.

  In subsequent S742-S744, the same process (refer FIG. 21) as S742-S744 of the accessory ratio calculation process of 1st Embodiment is performed, and a prize information preservation | save process is complete | finished.

  Next, an inspection result output process executed by the CPU 261 in the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this inspection result output processing. Similar to the first embodiment, this inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when a cable connector for connecting the inspection apparatus 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, the data in the second reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300.

  When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is output to the inspection apparatus 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls at each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e is associated with each information, together with the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, the recording time Are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed following the processing of S772, the same processing as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the inspection result output processing is terminated.

  The inspection apparatus 300 calculates the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening output in S772 and the winning ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated feature ratio and continuous feature ratio are analyzed. Then, when the ratio of the bonuses and the consecutive bonuses are high as a result of the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300, the cause is searched based on the information on the number of balls shot into the gaming area and the information on the gaming state. be able to. In addition, since the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening is output in order from the oldest time by the processing of S772, the inspection apparatus 300 analyzes each information in the output order. Thus, it is possible to easily analyze the change in the ratio of the accessory and the ratio of the consecutive accessory with the passage of time.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, every time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b is reached in the accessory ratio management chip 207, The values of the counters 263a to 263e, which are stored in the first reading memory 263 and count the total number of balls won for each winning opening, are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning opening recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is the winning ball number table 202e. And transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the total number of balls won in the corresponding winning opening is obtained for each winning opening, and recorded in the second reading memory 264 every time. Therefore, the storage capacity necessary for the second reading memory 264 is larger than that in the case where the calculated combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264 as in the first embodiment. Since the total number of winning balls for each winning opening is transmitted to the device 300, if the result of analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that there is a significant change in the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio, the inspection device 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning opening, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

  Further, the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening transmitted to the inspection device 300 is transmitted to the inspection device 300 in association with the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. The Therefore, in the inspection apparatus 300, when the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are analyzed as a result of analyzing the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning opening, , The time when the total number of balls won in each winning opening used to calculate the ratio of the changed role ratio or the continuous role ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264 is specified, By analyzing the total number of balls won in each winning opening, the total number of balls launched into the game area, or the gaming state, it is possible to find the cause of the change in the ratio of the bonuses or the continuous bonuses.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed. For example, in each embodiment, a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the other embodiments are added to the embodiment or replaced with a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Moreover, the numerical value quoted in the said embodiment is an example, and it is naturally possible to employ | adopt another numerical value.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described in which a counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 and the number of balls won for each winning opening is counted. However, for each winning opening, a counter provided in the first reading memory 263 is used. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted. And in 1st Embodiment, when it is the timing which calculates an accessory ratio, based on the number of the balls paid out by the winning for each winning mouth counted by the first reading memory 263, It is also possible to calculate the object ratio and the continuous character ratio and accumulate and record them in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the second embodiment, when it is time to calculate an accessory ratio, when it is time to calculate an accessory ratio, each winning prize is counted by the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by the above may be accumulated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. In this case, if the number of balls that won a prize for 0.5 seconds for each winning slot is stored in the buffer 262, the CPU 261 handles the number of balls that won for each winning slot. Multiply by the number of winning balls for the winning mouth to calculate the number of balls paid out by winning for 0.5 seconds, and the calculated number of balls paid out is provided in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the winning winning counter. Further, when the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning at one winning opening, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the winning opening where the winning has been made in the buffer 262. In the CPU 261, the winning that has been won in the buffer 262 is performed. When the information indicating the mouth is written, by adding the number of balls paid out by winning to the winning mouth to the corresponding winning mouth counter provided in the first reading memory 263, for each winning mouth, You may count the number of balls paid out by winning. In addition, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening for each winning slot every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time), and stores the number in the buffer 262. When the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 calculates, for each winning opening, the number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening for 0.5 seconds written in the buffer 262 for the first time. By adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. In addition, when the MPU 201 detects that there is a winning at one winning opening, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out by the winning in the area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262. In the CPU 261, when the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the payout written to the buffer 262 is paid to the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening in which the number of balls paid out is stored. By adding the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. As described above, even if the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 is configured to count the number of balls paid out by winning for each winning opening, paying out by winning for each winning opening thus counted. Since the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated from the number of the spheres thus obtained, the fraudulent act can be found by analyzing the calculated role ratio and the continuous role ratio. When the number of balls paid out by winning is stored in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201, the winning ball number table 202e does not need to be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207. From the number of balls paid out for winning in each winning opening stored in the winning opening, it is possible to calculate the ratio of consecutive items and the ratio of consecutive items. In addition, in order to calculate a winning combination ratio or a continuous winning ratio in the detection apparatus 300, the number of balls paid out by winning, which is counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the detection apparatus 300. . In this case, even if the content of the prize ball number table 202e is not transmitted to the detection device 300 to the detection device 300, the detection device 300 can calculate the approximate gate ratio and the continuous character ratio.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the accessory ratio data 264a and the continuous accessory ratio data 264b are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. However, only the accessory ratio data 264a is recorded. It may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300, or only the continuous character ratio data 264 b is recorded in the second reading memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. It may be. The inspection apparatus 300 can analyze an illegal act by analyzing the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio transmitted from the combination ratio management chip 207.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first reading memory 263 is configured by a volatile memory has been described. However, the first reading memory 263 is configured by a nonvolatile memory (for example, a flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, or the like). May be. Further, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first reading memory 263 even while the power is turned off. In this case, in the processing of S711 executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the accessory ratio management chip 207 (see FIG. 18), the first reading memory 263 may not be initialized. Accordingly, the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first reading memory 263 can be held while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the second reading memory 264 immediately before the power is turned off without executing the accessory ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process. Without missing the winnings at each winning opening that was determined to be when the power was turned off from the timing of recording (trigger), calculate the ratio of items, etc., and read the total number of winnings in the second reading It can be recorded in the memory 264. Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be unnecessary.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the case where the inspection result output process is executed and the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is output when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a has been described. In addition, information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) for recording in the second reading memory 264, the ratios of the bonuses and the continuous bonuses recorded in the second reading memory 264 are not obtained. Information that is not used for calculation or information that is not recorded in the second read / write memory 264. Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first reading memory 263 to the inspection apparatus 300, the inspection apparatus 300 can be analyzed using the latest information.

  In the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. However, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300, so that it is a short-term information, but the total number of balls won in each winning opening, and the consecutive characters The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp raw information before calculating the ratio. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  As a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio calculated by the combination ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the latest bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate from the total number of winning balls for each winning mouth transmitted from the first reading memory 263 using the prize ball number table 202e. And can be analyzed. In addition, the winning combination ratio and the consecutive winning ratio calculated here were won at each winning opening in a short period before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection apparatus 300 as reference values. .

  In addition, when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio based on information stored in the first reading memory 263, and the calculated accessory The ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the information recorded in the second reading memory 264. As a result, the inspection apparatus 300 can easily analyze fraud using the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio output from the combination ratio management chip 207. In this case, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may also be output to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, it is possible to cause the inspection apparatus 300 to perform a deep analysis using information related to the latest winning award. Also in this case, the prize ball number table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, it is possible to perform a deeper analysis while referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

  In each of the above embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the volatile first reading memory 263 and the non-volatile second reading memory 264 are provided, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is used. The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading memory 263 until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached. When the timing is reached, the first reading memory Based on the information stored in the H.263, the ratio of the bonuses and the consecutive bonuses are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated in the first reading memory 263 until the timing is reached. The case where the various information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, a non-volatile memory provided with at least a first reading area serving as the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area serving as the second reading memory 264 The information set for the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily accumulated in the first reading area until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. And when the timing is reached, based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, calculate an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio and record them in the second reading area, or Various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area before the timing may be recorded in the second reading area. Thereby, since the number of parts of the memory can be reduced, an increase in cost of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls won for each prize opening for 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. Thus, the number of balls counted for each winning opening, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information on the gaming state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. Each time the setting is made in the buffer 262, the number of balls won for each winning opening set in the buffer 262, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and the game state The case where information is accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interruption process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of the various switches. In this case, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on. When the winning of the second start port 64b is detected by the output of the second start port switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, and the first normal winning port switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d. When the normal 2 buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the big winning port 65a is detected by the output of the big winning port switch 208, the big winning port buffer 262e is turned on. When the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the out switch 208f, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding big hit buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, and error corresponding to the gaming state at that time An interrupt signal may be transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 after the middle buffer 262i is turned on. Then, in the setting information reception process executed upon receiving the interrupt signal, the accessory ratio management chip 207 increments the start 1 counter 263a by 1 when the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and the start 2 buffer 262b When it is turned on, the first 2 counter 263b is incremented by 1. When the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, the ordinary 1 counter 263c is incremented by 1. When the ordinary 2 buffer 262d is turned on, the ordinary 2 counter 263b is incremented by 2. The counter 263d is incremented by 1, and when the big prize buffer 262e is turned on, the big prize mouth counter 263e is incremented by one, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is incremented by one. If the big hit buffer 262g is on, the big hit The jackpot information is added and stored in the data 263g together with the time at that time, and when the open buffer 262h is on, the door open information is added to the open data 263h together with the time at that time. When the in-error buffer 262i is on, the in-error information is added to the in-error data 263i and stored together with the time at that time, and the time when the setting information reception processing is executed is the midnight time zone In this case, after-hours information may be added to and stored in the after-hours data 263j together with the time at that time. This eliminates the need for the MPU 201 to count the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning slot in 0.5 seconds or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and thus increases the processing load on the MPU 201. This can be suppressed. Therefore, much of the processing capability of the MPU 201 can be assigned to the main control of the game that should be originally performed by the MPU 201.

  Further, in this case, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are managed as the proportion ratio management. It may be input directly to the chip 207. Then, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first normal winning port switch 208c, the second normal winning port switch 208d, the big winning port switch 208e, the out switch 208f. From each of the outputs, the presence or absence of winning in the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first ordinary winning port 63a, the second ordinary winning port 63b, the big winning port 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening are counted up by one, and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path. In this case, the out counter 263f may be configured to count up by one. As a result, when there is a winning at the winning opening or when a ball is guided to the ball discharge path, the situation can be immediately reflected in the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open based on the output of the door release switch 208g. When the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the information on the door opening ratio is stored in addition to the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. The management chip 207 may be configured. Thereby, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected on the accessory ratio management chip 207.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, the number of balls that have won a prize at each winning opening before the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is set to the first. The counters 263a to 264e of the reading memory 263 are counted, and the number of balls discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing (trigger) is reached is counted by the out counter 263f of the first reading memory 263. As described above, in the first reading memory 263, the first 1 buffer 262a, the first 2 buffer 262b, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c, the ordinary 2 buffer 263c, and the big prize mouth buffer 262e set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds are stored. , Each value of the out buffer 262d (that is, the number of balls for each winning opening won in 0.5 seconds, and 0.5 seconds) The number of balls which are guided to the ball discharge passage) in between, together with the time at that indicated by RTC266, may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting rear 265b is reached, from the values stored in the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated. Calculate and record in the second reading memory 264, or calculate the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening until the timing, and discharged to the ball discharge path until that timing The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed by the inspection device 300 based on the ratio of the accessory and the continuous accessory ratio. can do. In this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, each winning opening that has won a prize in 0.5 seconds. The number of spheres for each and the number of spheres guided to the sphere discharge path during 0.5 seconds and the time associated with the number of spheres (that is, the number of spheres is the first reading memory). (Time when stored in H.263) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information such as how many balls were won at which time and which time at which prize opening at every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds, and how many balls were at which time every extremely short time of 0.5 seconds The inspection apparatus 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the vehicle has been guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., whether it has been launched into the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  As a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio calculated by the combination ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of winning balls transmitted to each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. Using the prize ball number table 202e, it is possible to calculate and analyze the latest bonus rate and continuous bonus rate. In addition, the winning combination ratio and the consecutive winning ratio calculated here were won at each winning opening in a short period before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection apparatus 300 as reference values. .

  In addition, the number of balls for each winning opening won in the first reading memory 263 in 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and their numbers When the time associated with the number of spheres (that is, the time when the number of spheres is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored, it is indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. When this timing (trigger) is reached, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the inspection device 300 records the number of balls for each winning opening recorded in the second reading memory 264 for 0.5 seconds and the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds. The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of these balls are transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. It may be. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, after calculating the total number of winning balls for each winning slot for each predetermined section from the number of winning balls for each winning slot every 0.5 seconds, the winning ball number table The possibility of fraud can be analyzed from the changes in the ratios of the actors and the consecutive actors by calculating the actors ratio and the consecutive actors ratio of each predetermined section using 202e. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of the actors suspected of fraud and the ratio of consecutive actors, the inspection apparatus 300 receives the number of balls for each winning mouth that has won in 0.5 seconds, and 0. Detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 5 seconds and the time associated with the number of balls, is input. The cause of the change in the ratio of physical properties and the ratio of consecutive objects can be investigated in detail.

  Further, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first buffer 262a, the first 2 buffer 262b, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c, the ordinary 2 buffer 263c, the big prize winning buffer 262e, and the out buffer which are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262d (i.e., the number of balls for each winning opening won during 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds) is indicated by RTC266. The time may be recorded directly in the second reading memory 264 sequentially with the current time. In this case, the gaming state of the second reading memory 264 is also combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 for information regarding the gaming state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the releasing buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds. The data 264d may be recorded. If the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed at midnight, the gaming state data 264d is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 in the overtime information. May be recorded. Thereby, since the 1st reading memory 263 can be made unnecessary, the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip | tip 207 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the MPU 201, when the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interruption process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of the various switches. Turns on the first buffer 262a and turns on the first buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and the output of the first ordinary winning port switch 208c. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the second ordinary winning opening 63b is turned on. When the buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and When a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the switch 208f, the first reading memory 263 is set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds when the out buffer 262f is turned on. Each value of the start 1 buffer 262a, start 2 buffer 262b, ordinary 1 buffer 262c, ordinary 2 buffer 263c, big prize opening buffer 262e, out buffer 262d (that is, information indicating the presence / absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening) And information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) may be sequentially stored together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, based on the respective values stored in the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory Calculate the ratio and record it in the second reading memory 264, or calculate the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening until that timing, and discharge to the ball discharge path before that timing The total number of spheres that have been played may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed by the inspection device 300 based on the ratio of the accessory and the continuous accessory ratio. can do. In this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, whether or not there is a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening. Information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) (Time) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information such as which time the winning opening was won at which time at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and the time at which the ball was discharged to the ball discharge path at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (ie, game Detailed information such as whether it has been launched into the area) can be grasped by the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  Further, in the MPU 201, when the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interruption process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of the various switches. Turns on the first buffer 262a and turns on the first buffer 262b when the winning of the second starting port 64b is detected by the output of the second starting port switch 208b, and the output of the first ordinary winning port switch 208c. When the winning of the first ordinary winning opening 63a is detected, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second ordinary winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d, the second ordinary winning opening 63b is turned on. When the buffer 262d is turned on and the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and When a ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected by the switch 208f, when the out buffer 262f is turned on, each buffer 262a corresponding to each winning mouth is stored in the first reading memory 263. When there is a buffer that is turned on among ˜262e, there is information indicating the winning opening where the winning has occurred, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path Information indicating this may be stored sequentially in accordance with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, based on the respective information stored in the first reading memory 263, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory Calculate the ratio and record it in the second reading memory 264, or calculate the total number of balls that have won in each winning opening until that timing, and discharge to the ball discharge path before that timing The total number of spheres that have been played may be calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264. Also by this, by transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, it is determined whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed by the inspection device 300 based on the ratio of the accessory and the continuous accessory ratio. can do. In this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, whether or not there is a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening. Information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) (Time) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, the inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as which winning opening at which time and information on which time it was guided to the ball discharge path (that is, when it was launched into the game area). It becomes like this. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

  As a modification of the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio calculated by the combination ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. When the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is also configured to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the prize ball number table 202e may be further transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, the inspection apparatus 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning mouth from the information indicating the presence / absence of the winning balls for each winning mouth every 2 milliseconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263. Thus, it is possible to calculate and analyze the latest bonus rate and continuous bonus rate using the prize ball number table 202e. In addition, the winning combination ratio and the consecutive winning ratio calculated here were won at each winning opening in a short period before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of spheres, the calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used for analysis of the inspection apparatus 300 as reference values. .

  Also, in the first reading memory 263, information indicating the presence / absence of a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, the information indicating the presence / absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds, and the corresponding information And the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, when the attached time (that is, the time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263) is stored. When this happens, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. In the inspection apparatus 300, information indicating the presence / absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening recorded in the second reading memory 264, and presence / absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds. And the time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 together. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, after calculating the total number of winning balls for each winning slot for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence / absence of a winning ball for each winning slot every 2 milliseconds, By using the number table 202e to calculate the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio for each predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraud from the changes in the accessory ratio and the consecutive accessory ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of a feature that is suspected of fraud and the ratio of consecutive features, the inspection device 300 includes information indicating whether or not there is a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening, and a ball for 2 milliseconds. Detailed information related to the game, such as information indicating the presence or absence of a ball guided to the discharge path and the time associated with the information, is input. The cause of the change in material ratio can be investigated in detail.

  Further, the first reading memory 263 includes information indicating a winning opening, information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and a time associated with the information (that is, The time when the information is stored in the first reading memory 263), the first time when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached. The information stored in the reading memory 263 may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. And in the inspection apparatus 300, information indicating that there is a winning winning opening recorded in the second reading memory 264, information indicating that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and those The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a may also be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, after calculating the total number of winning balls for each winning slot for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning opening where the winning has been made, The possibility of fraudulent acts can be analyzed from the changes in the ratios of the actors and the consecutive actors by calculating the actors ratio and the consecutive actors ratio in the predetermined section. In addition, when there is a change in the ratio of a feature that is suspected of fraud and the ratio of consecutive features, the inspection apparatus 300 includes information indicating a winning opening where a prize has been won and a ball guided to the ball discharge path. Detailed information related to the game, such as information indicating that and the time associated with the information, are input. You can explore in detail.

  Also, the first reading memory 263 is not provided, and the first 1 buffer 262a, the first 2 buffer 262b, the ordinary 1 buffer 262c, the ordinary 2 buffer 263c, the big prize opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262d set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. (Ie, information indicating the presence / absence of a winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening and the information indicating the presence / absence of a ball guided to the ball discharging path for 2 milliseconds) at each time indicated by the RTC 266 In addition, it may be recorded directly in the second reading memory 264 sequentially. In this case, the game state data stored in the second reading memory 264 is also combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 for information related to the game state set in the big hit buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds. In addition, when the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the overtime information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 in the gaming state data 264d. It may be recorded. Thereby, since the 1st reading memory 263 can be made unnecessary, the cost increase of the accessory ratio management chip | tip 207 can be suppressed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, an area in which information is recorded in the second reading memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the accessory ratio data 264a, the continuous accessory ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls 264c, and the game state data 264d) Is calculated, and in the second embodiment, the checksum value is calculated and stored in the second reading memory 264 in the second embodiment (the area where the shot ball number data 264c, the game state data 264d and the winning counter data 264e are recorded). In addition, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection public expenditure 300, the checksum value may be transmitted together. Then, in the inspection apparatus 300, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is received, a checksum value is calculated from the received information, and compared with the checksum value transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207, If they match, the received information may be determined to be correct information and analyzed. Thereby, it can suppress that an analysis is performed by the inspection apparatus 300 based on incorrect information.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and the inspection result output process is executed by the CPU 261 based on the interrupt signal, and the accessory ratio management Although the case where the information recorded in the chip 207 is output to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is based on a command transmitted from the inspection apparatus 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. The information recorded in the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, when the inspection apparatus 300 is ready to receive the information transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 and transmits a command to the accessory ratio management chip 207, Information transmitted from the object ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

  In each of the embodiments described above, when the CPU 261 is executing the accessory ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the winning information storage process (second embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and assigned. When the bonus signal is generated, the execution of the examination result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is waited while the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, and the bonus ratio calculation process or the prize information is performed. Execution of inspection result output may be started after the storage process is completed. As a result, the examination result output process is executed during the execution of the bonus ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and the strange information is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 because it is being written to the second reading memory 264. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

  In each of the above embodiments, a case has been described where winning information or the like is transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110. However, information output from the MPU 201 from the accessory ratio management chip 207 And some processing may be executed based on the information. For example, when the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 stops or when an error occurs in the processing of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Based on the information, the MPU 201 notifies the fact by displaying on the first symbol display device 37, lighting / flashing of the lamp, outputting by voice, displaying on the third symbol display device 81, and the like. You may control. Thereby, the hall personnel can know the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207, and can take some measures. Further, the MPU 201 is based on the information that means that the operation of the accessory ratio management chip 207 has stopped or the information that means that an error has occurred in the processing in the accessory ratio management chip 207. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved, and the accessory ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 receives the accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko machine The MPU 201 may control to perform the first predetermined notification in the machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, when the consecutive accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 is received by the MPU 201 and the consecutive accessory ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio. The MPU 201 may perform control so that the pachinko machine 10 performs the second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio is appropriately calculated from information stored in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, and is transmitted to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. As the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, as the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 so as to turn on or blink a predetermined lamp in a predetermined method or output a predetermined sound. Alternatively, a command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 so that a predetermined symbol or character is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the voice lamp control device 113 displays the command based on the command. A command may be further transmitted to 114. In addition, as a first predetermined notification or a second predetermined notification, a hall computer provided in a hall in which the pachinko machine 10 is installed is connected to a first predetermined ratio through a relay base (not shown). You may make it transmit the information which shows that it is higher than a ratio, or the information which shows that a continuous accessory ratio is higher than a 2nd predetermined ratio. By these notifications, it is possible to notify the hall officials directly from the pachinko machine 10 of the abnormality in the ratio of the accessory of the pachinko machine 10 or the continuous actor ratio. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 that may have been cheated on the pachinko machine 10. Moreover, it can be connected with suppression of fraud by performing such alerting | reporting.

  In each of the above embodiments, the accessory ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated accessory ratio or continuous accessory ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio, and The determination result may be output to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform control so as to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result received from the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 itself may execute control for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the determination result. For example, the LEDs that perform these notifications are connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, and when the accessory ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification, these LEDs are driven and controlled. May be. Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first symbol display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the accessory ratio management chip 207 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Based on the above, it may be controlled to perform lighting / flashing of a predetermined lamp, output of a predetermined sound, or predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81. Also, information indicating that the bonus rate is higher than the first predetermined rate, or the continuous bonus rate is higher than the second predetermined rate, directly from the bonus rate management chip 207 to the hall computer. Information indicating this may be transmitted. Also by this, it is possible to directly notify the hall related parties of the abnormality in the ratio of the accessory of the pachinko machine 10 or the ratio of the consecutive actors from the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to easily find the pachinko machine 10 that may have been cheated on the pachinko machine 10. Moreover, it can be connected with suppression of fraud by performing such alerting | reporting.

  In the second embodiment, when the accessory ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the winning ball set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a is also added. The case where the information of the number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the accessory ratio management chip 207, when the inspection apparatus 300 is output to the inspection terminal 207a, or based on a control signal from the inspection apparatus 300, the winning ball number table 202e is given to the MPU 201. May be configured such that the winning combination ratio management chip 207 transmits the prize ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request to the inspection apparatus 300. The inspection apparatus 300 directly outputs a signal requesting the MPU 201 to transmit the prize ball number table 202e, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and directly transmits the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection apparatus 300. You may make it do. Also, after connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the winning ball number table 202e is transmitted to the inspection device 300 during the startup process executed by the MPU 201. You may make it do. As a result, the accessory ratio management chip 207 can eliminate the prize ball number data setting area 265a and can reduce the number of registers.

  The main controller 110 may not manually transmit the prize ball number table 202e to the inspection apparatus 300, and the number of prize balls for the inspection apparatus 300 may be set manually. As a result, the main control device 110 does not need to perform control for transmitting the prize ball number table 202e, so that the MPU 201 program and the accessory ratio management chip 207 program can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the prize ball number table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the prize ball number table 202e is transmitted to the accessory ratio 300. Also good. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility of an illegal act due to a change in the ratio of the winning combination and the continuous winning ratio while referring to the prize ball number table 202e.

  In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300 may be provided between the second reading memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. Good. As a result, even when the reading speed of information read from the second reading memory 264 and the transmission speed for transmitting information to the accessory ratio management chip 207 are different, 2 Information can be easily transmitted from the reading memory 264 to the inspection apparatus 300.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the information related to the ratio of the items is recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. explained. On the other hand, the first reading memory 263 is stored as long as the first reading memory 263 is turned off by configuring the first reading memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first reading memory 263. It may be configured so that when power is supplied, information relating to the ratio of the items and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. Also by this, it is possible to calculate the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate without omission with respect to the number of prize balls that are recorded in the second reading memory 264 and then paid out before the power is turned off. . In addition, since the recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the power is completely cut off during the recording to the second reading memory 264.

  In each of the embodiments described above, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the second item of information related to the accessory ratio and the like is automatically obtained based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 under the control of the CPU 261. The case of recording in the reading memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, as the timing (trigger) for recording the information related to the ratio of the items to the second reading memory 264, “Power supply” may be defined. If the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is “power off”, when it is detected that the power is turned off, the trigger information data 202f is based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. If the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is “power supply”, the first reading is performed when power is supplied. Based on the information stored in the memory 263, information related to the accessory ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Thereby, according to the setting of the ROM 202f in the MPU 201, the information related to the ratio of the items based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 is recorded in the second reading memory 264, when the power is cut off, This can be done when power is supplied. If “power supply” can be defined as the trigger information data 202f, the first reading memory 263 is configured as a non-volatile memory, or a backup voltage is supplied to the first reading memory 263, etc. The reading memory 263 may be configured so that it can be stored even when the power is turned off.

  In each of the embodiments described above, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, the timing (trigger) for recording information related to the ratio of items to the second reading memory 264 is “number of fires”. ”,“ Time ”, and“ game time ”are described. On the other hand, the “power supply time” may be defined in the trigger information data 202f. When the information indicating the “power supply time” is defined in the trigger information data 202f, the information indicating the “predetermined time” that is the timing for recording the information related to the accessory ratio etc. in the second reading memory 264 is also defined. May be. For example, if the trigger information data 202f includes information indicating “power supply time” and information indicating 4 hours as “predetermined time”, the accessory ratio management chip 207 displays the trigger setting area 265b in the trigger setting area 265b. At the stage of setting the trigger information data 202f, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, the acquired time is stored in the memory as the “power supply time measurement start time”, and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 It is determined from the difference from the “power supply time measurement start time” whether or not 4 hours have passed since the power was supplied, and when 4 hours have passed, it is stored in the first reading memory 263 in the accessory ratio management chip 207. On the basis of the information thus obtained, information related to the ratio of the items may be recorded in the second reading memory 264. Then, the time when the recording is performed is obtained from the RTC 266, and the time is stored in the memory as a new “power supply time measurement start time”. Thereafter, the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the “power supply time measurement” are stored. It may be determined from the difference from the “start time” whether four hours have passed. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the ratio of the accessory by the power supply time, even if the game is not so much played in the pachinko machine 10, the power supply time has passed for a predetermined time, so It is possible to calculate the property ratio and the continuous feature ratio. Therefore, it is possible to cause the inspection apparatus 300 to reliably analyze the presence / absence of fraud based on the reliably calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio.

  In the second embodiment, information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 indicates the total number of balls won at each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. Has been described in conjunction with the award ball number table 202e. On the other hand, when information indicating the total number of balls won at each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300, the information is based on information at each timing. Then, it is also possible to calculate an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio at each timing, and also send information indicating the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio to the inspection apparatus 300. Alternatively, when performing transmission to the inspection device 300, instead of information indicating the total number of balls won at each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, the ratio of the winning combination and the consecutive combination are based on the information. An object ratio may be calculated, and the calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, it is not necessary to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when calculating the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate by the inspection apparatus 300, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set incorrectly or incorrectly. However, if the bonus rate ratio management chip 207 calculates the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting rear 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and it is possible to accurately calculate the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate.

  Further, not only in the second embodiment, the second reading memory 264 does not store information indicating the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio, and the information necessary to calculate at least one of these is the first. In the case of being stored in the two reading memory 264, when performing transmission to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 calculates the ratio of the combination and the continuous combination from the information stored in the second reading memory 264. The calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio may be output to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264 or instead of the information. Thereby, in the inspection apparatus 300, it is not necessary to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio, and the analysis by the inspection apparatus 300 can be facilitated. In addition, when calculating the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate by the inspection apparatus 300, the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate may be calculated based on the prize ball number table set incorrectly or incorrectly. However, if the bonus rate ratio management chip 207 calculates the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate, the number of prize balls in the prize ball number data setting rear 265a set by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the prize ball number table 202e is tampered with illegally, and it is possible to accurately calculate the bonus rate and the continuous bonus rate. Further, if the calculated combination ratio and continuous combination ratio are output to the inspection apparatus 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the combination ratio and continuous combination ratio are obtained in the inspection apparatus 300. If it is determined that there is a suspicious point, the cause can be searched based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. Further, in the inspection apparatus 300, the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio output from the combination ratio management chip 207 are calculated by calculating the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio based on the information stored in the second reading memory 264. By determining whether or not they match, it is possible to determine whether any fraudulent activity has been performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the out switch 208f for detecting the guided ball guided to the ball discharge path is provided, and the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f is counted, so that the ball is fired into the game area. Although the case where the number of balls is counted has been described, various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls launched into the game area. For example, an out port switch for detecting a ball passing through the out port 66 is provided, and the number of balls passing through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch and the first winning prize detected by the first start port switch 208a are provided. The number of balls passing through the mouth 64a, the number of balls passing through the second winning port 64b detected by the second starting port switch 208b, and the first normal winning port 63a detected by the first normal winning port switch 208c. The number of balls that have passed through, the number of balls that have passed through the second normal winning port 63b detected by the second normal winning port switch 208d, and the ball that has passed through the big winning port 65a detected by the big winning port switch 208e. The number of balls launched into the game area may be calculated by summing the number of. Also, a supply ball detection switch for detecting a ball supplied to the ball launch unit 112a, and a foul ball that is launched by the ball launch unit 112a and detects a ball discharged from the ball guide passage as a foul ball without reaching the game area. A detection switch, which is counted up by 1 every time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch, and counted down by 1 every time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. May be counted. In addition, instead of the supply sphere detection switch, a launch sphere detection switch for detecting the sphere launched by the sphere launch unit 112a is provided. The number of balls launched into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by 1 each time a ball is detected by the switch. Further, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the front end portion of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects a ball guided from the ball guide path to the game area, thereby detecting the game ball. By providing a counter that counts up by 1 each time a ball is detected by the switch, the balls that have been launched into the game area may be counted.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the CPU 261 is provided in the accessory ratio management chip 207, and based on software executed by the CPU 261, information related to the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the inspection apparatus The case of transmitting to 300 has been described. On the other hand, part or all of the functions of the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By configuring with wired logic, it is possible to perform management of information related to the ratio of the objects at high speed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case has been described in which the accessory ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, information on the accessory ratio is recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207, and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the information regarding the ratio of the objects is recorded in the non-volatile memory by the MPU 201, and the information recorded in the non-volatile memory is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 by the MPU 201. You may control to do. As a result, the MPU 201 uses the information regarding the winning of the ball at each winning opening detected by the MPU 201 and the information about the ball guided to the ball discharging path by the MPU 201 itself without transferring it to another chip, and the information regarding the ratio of the bonus Since it can be managed, it becomes difficult to be affected by noise, and it is possible to more accurately manage information on the ratio of the objects.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main controller 110 so that the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the main controller 110 are connected. In this case, the accessory ratio management chip 110 may be stored in the same substrate box 100 as the main control device 110, or may be stored in a different substrate box from the substrate box 100 in which the main control device 110 is stored. Good. When the accessory ratio management chip 207 is stored in a board box different from the main controller 110, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a board box dedicated to the accessory ratio management chip 207 or other control. The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be stored in any one of the substrate boxes 101 to 104 in which devices and the like are stored.

  The accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the payout control device 111. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 gives the payout control device 111 information related to winning for each winning mouth (for example, a ball that has won a prize for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning mouth). May be transmitted to the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, in the winning ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, together with the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out), the winning ball to which winning a prize is associated is determined. Based on the prize ball command, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the buffer 262 in the area corresponding to the winning opening where the prize has been won, and the buffer 262 is set. By adding the number of winning balls to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, for each winning opening, the counter of the balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning opening with the counter. The number may be counted. Furthermore, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also in these cases, the information relating to the accessory ratio can be recorded by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300. In these cases, the information in the winning ball number table 202e and the information in the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main controller 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on in the main controller 110. May be sent to the payout control device 111 by a command. As a result, using these pieces of information stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the sound lamp control device 113. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the sound lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, the main control device 110 has received a prize for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 regarding the winning combinations. Information indicating the number of balls) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Furthermore, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 213 of the sound lamp control device 113 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also according to these, information related to the accessory ratio can be recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, by managing the accessory ratio with the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the voice lamp control device 113, the calculated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, and the like are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A command may be transmitted to the control device 114. By displaying on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the hall personnel can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 10 having a strange ratio of the actors and the consecutive actors, or prevent the fraudster from performing an improper act. Can do. In addition, when the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio calculated by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which an illegal act is suspected), the sound output device 226 performs a predetermined operation. In order for the sound lamp control device 113 to perform control to output the notification sound of the above, or to turn on / flash the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined manner, or to display the predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be transmitted to the display control device 114. Thereby, the hall related person can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 10 suspected of cheating, and can also prevent the cheating person from performing an unlawful act. In these cases, in the main control device 110, information on the winning ball number table 202e and information on the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main control device by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. 110 may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by a command. As a result, by using these pieces of information stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110, it is possible to manage the accessory ratio and the like on the sound lamp control device 113 side.

  Further, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114. Then, the accessory ratio management chip 207 may record information on the accessory ratio based on a signal from the display control device 114 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300. In this case, information related to winning for each winning mouth (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning mouth) from the main controller 110 to the display controller 114 via the audio lamp controller 113. (Information indicating the number of balls that won a prize) during this period, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Further, instead of the accessory ratio management chip 207, the MPU 214 of the display control device 114 may realize the function of the accessory ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the information regarding the accessory ratio can be recorded and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 by the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114. In addition, by controlling the accessory ratio with the accessory ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, display control is performed to display the calculated accessory ratio, continuous accessory ratio, etc. on the third symbol display device 81. Device 114 may do so. By displaying on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the hall personnel can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 10 having a strange ratio of the actors and the consecutive actors, or prevent the fraudster from performing an improper act. Can do. In addition, when the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio calculated by the combination ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraud is suspected), a predetermined display is displayed as the third pattern. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81. Thereby, the hall related person can easily find the pachinko gaming machine 10 suspected of cheating, and can also prevent the cheating person from performing an unlawful act. In these cases, in the main control device 110, information on the winning ball number table 202e and information on the trigger information data 202f are stored in the main control device by a startup process executed by the MPU 201 when power is turned on. The command may be transmitted from 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, by using these pieces of information stored in the RAM 202 of the main control device 110, it is possible to manage the accessory ratio and the like on the display control device 114 side.

  In each of the embodiments described above, on the board on which the main control device 110 is provided, or connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 is mounted, or the accessory ratio management chip 207 A display device provided with a plurality of 7-segment displays may be provided on a substrate on which a control device that realizes the function is provided, and an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display device. The display device is configured by a liquid crystal display having a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display, so that the feature ratio or the continuous feature ratio is displayed. It may be. Accordingly, by looking at the display device, it is possible to determine the possibility that an illegal act has been performed based on the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio. In addition, on this display device, both of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory may be displayed at the same time, or only one of them may be displayed. Moreover, you may display an accessory ratio and a continuous accessory ratio alternately for every predetermined time. When the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio are displayed alternately, information indicating which is displayed may be displayed together. In addition, when the ratio of the actors to be displayed on the display device or the ratio of the consecutive actors exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, when the ratio of the actors exceeds 70%, the ratio of the consecutive actors is 60%. In the case of exceeding, the displayed combination ratio or continuous combination ratio may be displayed in a color different from normal or blinked. In the display device, the pachinko machine 10 may be powered on for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 30 seconds) or until the startup process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Only the period until the predetermined process is completed, such as a period, may be displayed). Thereby, the hall personnel can easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity by confirming the ratio of consecutive items or the ratio of consecutive items displayed on the display device when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. . Further, in the display device, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there is any fraudulent activity by confirming the proportions of the objects and the consecutive characters displayed on the display device when the hall personnel turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10. . In addition, the display of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio on the display device when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off may be a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined time such as 10 seconds) It may be limited to the period until the predetermined process ends (for example, the period until the process related to power-off is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (for example, the period until the process of S705 ends)). . In addition, when it is determined that the power of the pachinko machine 10 has been cut off, the display of the ratio of equipment and the continuous equipment ratio on the display device uses power from a backup power source, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, etc. It may be done. The display device may be housed in the substrate box. Thereby, it can suppress that the act of displaying an incorrect value with respect to a display apparatus is performed.

  In addition, the display device is provided with a button for displaying an accessory ratio or a continuous accessory ratio, and when the button is operated, the accessory ratio or the consecutive accessory ratio is displayed on the display device. Also good. As a result, only when the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio is confirmed, by operating the button, the combination ratio or the continuous combination ratio can be displayed on the display device. It is possible to suppress wasteful consumption of electric power. Further, the operation of the button may be effective only when the game is in the non-execution state in the pachinko gaming machine 10, and the display device may display the bonus rate or the continuous bonus rate. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, it is determined that the game is not executed, for example, when the detection of the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is not detected for a predetermined time or when the operation handle 51 rotates. This may be done when the ball is not operated, when the ball is not fired by the ball launching unit 112a, or when the ball guided to the game area is detected as fire. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an illegal acter from trying to perform some fraud by looking at the ratio of the items displayed on the display device while playing the game.

  Further, the operation of the button may be valid only when operated in combination with other buttons. Thereby, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person who does not know the combination of button operations to be effective from displaying the combination ratio and the continuous combination ratio easily on the display device. Further, only when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while operating the buttons for displaying the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio on the display device, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are displayed on the display device. May be. Thereby, when the hall personnel turn on the power to the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, it is possible to confirm the combination ratio displayed on the display device and the continuous combination ratio. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity during business hours or outside night hours. In addition, only when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off while operating the buttons for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio on the display device, the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio is displayed on the display device. May be. As a result, when the hall officials turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10, by operating the buttons together, it is possible to check the ratio of consecutive items and the ratio of consecutive items displayed on the display device today. It is easy to confirm whether there was any misconduct before or during today's business. The display of the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio on the display device by the operation of the button may be ended based on the elapse of a predetermined period, or may be ended when the button is operated again. Further, only the period during which the operation of the button is continuously performed, the combination ratios and the continuous combination ratios may be displayed on the display device.

  In addition, when the button is operated and the display of the bonus rate or the continuous bonus rate, the game mode of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is set to the check mode, and the main control of the game in the main controller 110 is performed. It may be temporarily stopped. Thereby, as the game progresses, it is possible to suppress a change in the ratio of the actors displayed on the display device and the ratio of the consecutive actors, making it difficult to check the actors ratio and the like. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the check mode and temporarily stops the main control of the game with respect to the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). A command for notifying transition to the check mode may be transmitted. When the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive a command notifying that the mode is changed to the check mode, for example, the third symbol display device 81 receives a predetermined image (for example, a black screen) corresponding to the check mode. ) Is displayed, the fluctuation effect being executed is continuously fluctuated during the check mode, the voice output from the voice output device 226 is also a predetermined voice corresponding to the check mode, or the voice corresponding to the high speed fluctuation. Or may be controlled to output. Thereby, it can be shown to the player that the pachinko gaming machine 10 has entered the check mode. Further, the main control device 110 releases the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko gaming machine 10 and resumes the main control of the game at the stage of resuming the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). A command may be transmitted to notify that is released. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are returned to those before the transition to the check mode. Can do.

  Moreover, although the modification demonstrated so far demonstrated the case where a button operation was performed and a character ratio and a continuous character ratio were displayed on the display apparatus provided on board | substrates, such as the main controller 110, this was demonstrated. In addition to this, or instead of this, when a button operation is performed, information relating to the ratio of a feature or a continuous feature is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. Alternatively, the sound output device 226 may output some notification sound regarding the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio. In this case, the above-described modification may be applied as appropriate in connection with the button operation.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the inspection apparatus 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the case where information related to the accessory ratio is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. When a button operation is performed, information relating to the accessory ratio may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Also in this case, the above-described modification may be applied as appropriate in connection with the button operation.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 206 is transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. However, based on the information managed by the accessory ratio management chip 206, the main controller 110, etc., on the display device provided on the substrate 110 or the like, or the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. In the case where it is configured to display some information related to the continuous character ratio, or to output some notification sound related to the character ratio or continuous character ratio from the audio output device 226, it is inspected. Transmission to the apparatus 300 may not necessarily be performed.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the large-capacity capacitor 267 or the secondary battery is connected to the accessory ratio management chip 207 and the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the accessory ratio management chip 207 is used. In the above description, a case has been described in which the electric power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to execute a process associated with power-off. On the other hand, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the accessory ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery. Thereby, the information stored in the first reading memory 263 can be held while the power is turned off. In addition, when a fraudulent person tries to set illegal information in the buffer 207 at midnight, the off-hour information is stored in the over-time data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then the second reading is performed at a predetermined timing. The overtime information can be recorded in the game state data 264d of the memory 264.

  In the above embodiment, when the MPU 201 determines whether or not the transmission of the interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone by the process of S724 (see FIG. 19), the time indicated by the RTC 266 is The MPU 201 may set the image described for determining whether or not it is between midnight and early morning 6:00, and the time threshold used to determine this midnight time zone. For example, the midnight time zone determination time data defining the threshold of the time is stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201, and the winning ball number table 202e is included in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when power is supplied. In addition to the trigger information data 202f, the midnight time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265. Then, in the processing of S724, it may be determined whether or not the MPU 201 transmits an interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 in the time zone indicated by the midnight time zone determination time data. Thereby, the judgment of the midnight time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202.

  In each of the above embodiments, when power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time, At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time. Further, when power is turned on to the accessory ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the gaming state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. As a result, information related to the time when the power is turned on is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, in the case where there is a possibility of fraud due to changes in the ratio of the actors and the ratio of consecutive actors, the cause of the misconduct can be explored in a multifaceted manner together with the time when the power is turned on.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power off information is stored in the first reading memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. The power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second reading memory 264 together with the time at a predetermined timing. In this case, the first reading memory 263 may be configured by a non-volatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Further, when the power to the accessory ratio management chip 207 is turned off, the power-off information may be directly recorded in the gaming state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first reading memory 263 is not necessarily configured by a nonvolatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Thereby, the information regarding the time when the power was turned off is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. Therefore, when there is a possibility of fraud due to a change in the ratio of the actors and the ratio of consecutive actors, the cause of the misconduct can be investigated in a multifaceted manner together with the time when the power is turned off.

  In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main controller 110 is turned off and the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 17) of the MPU 201, after the processing of S704 is executed, S705 is executed. Before the above process is executed, the same process as that of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed. That is, after the interruption process is prohibited in the process when the power is turned off (S704), the values of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the ordinary 1 counter 203f, the ordinary 1 counter 203g, the ordinary 2 counter 203g and the big prize counter 203h of the RAM 203 are displayed. Is set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, set in the accessory ratio management chip 207a, and an interrupt signal is transmitted to the accessory ratio management chip 207 May be. As a result, the power is turned off for the number of balls that have won the winning award immediately before the power is turned off or the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path and are not counted in the accessory ratio management chip 207. It is possible to count with the accessory ratio management chip 207 before starting. Therefore, it is possible to record the number of balls won at each winning opening immediately before the power is turned off and the balls guided to the ball discharge path by the accessory ratio management chip 207 without omission.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the accessory ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is “game time”, a ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is detected. Although the case where the game time is calculated by counting the played time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an out port switch that detects a ball that has passed through the out port 66 is provided, and the out port switch, the first start port switch 208a, the second start port switch 208b, the first ordinary winning port switch 208c, and the second ordinary winning port. When the passing of a ball to each winning opening or out opening is detected by any one of the switch 208d and the big winning opening switch 208e, the game time is calculated by counting the detected time. Also good. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time when it is determined that the player is touching the firing handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the firing handle 51. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the player 51 is rotated by the player, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the firing handle 51 and rotates the firing handle 51. You may calculate game time. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball launch unit 112a is driven by the launch control device 112 and the ball is being launched. In addition, a game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the front end portion of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area is continuously detected. By doing so, the game time may be calculated.

  In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 issues a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. In addition, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command instructing the output of each sound and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the sound lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the case where the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON if a stop type command is received has been described. When the stop type command is received after the occurrence of the error, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON. Thereby, when there is no reception of a fluctuation pattern command and a stop type command is received, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange fluctuation effect.

  Further, the fluctuation start flag may be set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the sound lamp control device 113, a display for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command based on the variation start flag being turned on. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. This causes the display control device 114 to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive the stop type command. Can do. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command. You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval of one frame of image drawing processing (in the above embodiment, every 20 milliseconds) will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the demonstration effect may be to stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”. Moreover, the 3rd symbol which consists of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be made to stop-display in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above-described embodiment, the continuous notice effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 in which the fluctuating effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided. The continuous notice effect may be executed by causing the fourth symbol display device to display the fourth symbol together with the variation effect executed by the three symbol display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or by the sound lamp control device 113. Moreover, the continuous notice effect may be executed by providing the accessory that operates according to various effects in the pachinko machine 10 and operating the accessory in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect. Further, the continuous warning effect may be executed by outputting the voice for the continuous warning effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 The continuous notice effect may be executed by turning on or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

  As a result, every time a variation effect is performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 (and the 1st symbol display device 37), the symbols are continuously displayed on the 4th symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or a sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting units 29 to 33 are turned on or blinking, so that the player can have a big hit expectation. In addition, the player usually keeps on playing the game while paying attention to the 3rd symbol display device 81 where the variation effect is performed, but the 4D symbol display device other than the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the symbol. Because the continuous announcement effect is performed by the operation of the accessory, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting / flashing of the lighting parts 29 to 33, an effect different from the normal effect is performed for the player. Can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous notice effect is easily continued by simple control such as display of a symbol by the fourth symbol display device, operation of an accessory, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33. A notice effect can be performed.

  Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by voice output from the sound output device 226 or lighting or blinking of the lighting parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. The main control device 110 performs the lottery process at the time of start / failure and the start of variation, causes the audio lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect. When performing a notice effect, each control apparatus can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

  In addition, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous notice effect in the 4th symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the sound output device 226 A combination of at least two of the output and lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute the continuous notice effect. Thereby, a more various continuous notice effect can be performed. Also, a method for executing a continuous notice effect (display by the 3rd symbol display device 81, display by the 4th symbol display device, operation of the accessory, audio output from the audio output device 226, lighting or flashing of the lighting units 29 to 33) Or a combination of them) to prepare a plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state (15R probability change big hit, 2R probability change big hit, 15R normal big hit, off) after the end of the continuous notice effect. Also good.

  Further, when the continuous notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous notice effect is ended. As the stop symbol to be displayed, a so-called “chance eye” which is a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed. In this case, when the reception of the continuous notice command is determined in the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27C) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 113, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. Other stop symbol determination flags may be set to off. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command processes, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. Set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance item can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. And if the chance pattern is continuously displayed as a stop symbol for each variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a jackpot is finally obtained.

  In the embodiment described above, the main controller 110 determines the number of reserved balls added by “1” when the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are awarded (start winning prize). In the above description, a case has been described in which the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer are transmitted as they are to the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the starting ball number command notified to The type of counter included in the ball number command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include other counter values. In addition, when the main controller 110 notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the values of the respective counters acquired with the start winning prize, the information indicating the values of these counters is included in the reserved ball number command. Instead of this, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command different from the reserved ball number command, and these values may be notified to the voice lamp control device 113. As another command, a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize may be used, or other information such as a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired along with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in accordance with the start winning prize is notified to the audio lamp control device 113, the value of each counter notified to the command is a variable effect corresponding to any number of holding times. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113, based on the information regarding the number of times of holding included in the command, in each of the pre-read information first to fourth areas corresponding to the number of holding times, A counter value can be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the held ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a held ball count command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether or not it is a big hit based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, the type of jackpot in the case of a big hit, miss In this case, a part or all of the detachment type etc. is determined, and these determination results are replaced with the value of each counter indicated by the command, or together with a part or all of the value of the counter, You may store in RAM223.

  In each of the above embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the main controller 110 uses the one retained ball number counter 203a to determine the retained ball number. The case of counting has been described. On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter for the first start port corresponding to the first start port 64a, the retained ball number counter for the second start port corresponding to the second start port 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 It is also possible to separately count the number of held balls associated with the start winning at the first start port 64a and the number of held balls for the start winning at the second start port 64b.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case has been described in which the maximum number of balls that can be held is set to “4” regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won. Separately determining and managing the maximum number of balls that can be held along with the start winning at the first start port 64a and the maximum number of balls that can be held along with the start winning at the second start port 64b Also good. For example, “4” is set as the maximum number of balls that can be held in accordance with the start winning in the first start port 64a, and “4” is set as the maximum number of balls that can be held in accordance with the start winning in the second start port 64b. As a result, at a certain time, the number of reserved balls held with the start winning at the first starting port 64a is “4” and the number of held balls held with the starting winning at the second start port 64b In the situation where is “2”, even if there is more start prizes in the first start port 64a, the start prize is not held, but if there is a start prize in the second start port 64b, it is put on hold. May be. Thereby, a player can be made to recognize that the 1st starting port 64a and the 2nd starting port 64b are different, and the interest of a game can be heightened.

  Further, for example, the variation effect based on the start winning to the second start port 64b may be performed with priority over the variation effect based on the start winning to the first start port 64a. Alternatively, the variation effect based on the start winning at the first start port 64a may be preferentially performed over the variation effect based on the start winning at the second start port 64b. Thereby, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the start port where the change effect is preferentially performed.

  In the above embodiment, a description will be given of a case where the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b and the two start ports are arranged in the game board 13 as start ports for starting the big win lottery when entering the ball. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of start ports may be one or a plurality of three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, a corresponding holding ball number counter is prepared in the RAM 203 for each starting port, and each starting port has a holding ball held with a winning to the corresponding starting port. You may make it count a number. Moreover, you may set the maximum number of hold | maintenance balls which can be hold | maintained with the start winning to a corresponding start opening for every start opening.

  In addition, when there are two or more start ports, the number of held balls command that the main control device 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 in order to notify that the hold has been performed in accordance with the winning at the start port is either Information indicating whether or not a hold has been made by winning at the start-up port may be included. In addition, in the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started, information indicating which variation effect is suspended by which start port may be included. As a result, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each starting port and a reserved ball number command is received, the reserved ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the reserved ball number command is received. When the number of held balls is set to and a fluctuation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by reducing the holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the changing pattern command by one.

  In addition, when a plurality of start openings are provided on the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 may be notified of the counter value acquired with winning (start winning) for each start opening. In this case, the command for the main control device 110 to notify the sound lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired with the start winning is the one acquired with the start winning to any start opening. Information indicating whether or not it exists may be included. In addition, the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may include information indicating which variation effect is associated with the start winning at which start port. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a pre-read information storage area is prepared for each start port, and each counter value transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the start winning to the corresponding start port corresponds to each start value. You may store in a prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, a shift process can be performed on the pre-read information storage area corresponding to the start opening that has detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. it can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the fluctuating production pending for each start port can also be held in the audio lamp control device 113. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the outage type, etc. are different depending on the start opening that has won the start, whether or not each variation effect in the look-ahead process is a jackpot, It is possible to correctly determine the jackpot type when the jackpot is won, the losing type when the jackpot is missed, and the like based on which starting opening the winning prize. In addition, when the variation effect based on the start winning for one start port is performed in preference to the change effect based on the start winning for another start port, the variation based on the start winning for the one start port Prefetch processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the effect, and it is possible to correctly determine the number of suspensions of the variable effect that will be the biggest hit most recently.

  Further, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the audio lamp control device 113 continuously notices when the value of each counter acquired based on the start winning to the start port is received from the main control device 110 by a command. If the start of the production is determined, the continuous notice production may be executed over all the fluctuation productions (holding balls) that are put on hold at that time regardless of the start opening where the start winning is made. In addition, in a pachinko machine that has a plurality of start openings and executes a variation effect for a winning at one start opening with priority over a change effect for a winning at another start opening, the priority is given preferentially. You may make it determine the start of a continuous notice effect only from the prefetch result of the counter value acquired with respect to the winning at the starting port where a variation effect is performed. As a result, the presence / absence of the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not started for this variable effect. If, for example, a continuous notice effect is started for a fluctuating effect corresponding to a winning entry at a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously held at a high priority start point, the continuous notice effect will end easily. There is a risk of not doing so. On the other hand, in this modified example, the presence / absence of the setting of execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting port having a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is determined for this variable effect. Is not started, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

In the above embodiment, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the case where the value of the number of reserved balls stored in the RAM 223 is decreased by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26) will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a variation process (FIG. 13) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.
(See S305 in FIG. 13), the value (N) of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the change pattern command being set in the change start process (S307). A reserved ball number command is set so that the control device 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113, and the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. It may be transmitted. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 more accurately. In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Further, the value (N) of the retained ball number counter 203a after the subtraction may be included in the variation pattern command. In this case, when the voice lamp control device 112 receives the fluctuation pattern command, the voice lamp control apparatus 112 may extract the number of held balls (N) included in the fluctuation pattern command and set it to the number of held balls stored in the RAM 223.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are configured to be held up to 4 times each for winning and passing through the through gate 67, but the maximum number of balls to be held is 4 times. It is not limited and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the maximum number of retained balls may be set separately by the start port for winning at the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. It may be any number other than “”. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls at each start port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on winning to the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b is expressed by a number or a four-divided area in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The display may be displayed in a different form (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the reserved ball is provided by the light emitting member. You may comprise so that a number may be notified.

  Further, as shown in the above-described embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation that scrolls all the symbols Z1 to Z3 so fast that the player cannot visually recognize the high-speed variation is described. Thus, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed in a reduced size so that they cannot be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In the slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by a bonus (combination) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the bonus rate. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table 202e, and is equivalent to the winning combination ratio management chip or the winning combination ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of winning combinations established during the non-bonus game period (normal period) (with symbols on the active line), the number of winning combinations during the bonus game period, and establishment during the AT period It is also possible to count the number of winning combinations and manage the winning combination ratio and the continuous winning ratio.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

A gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game;
Launching means for launching gaming media into the gaming area;
A winning detection means that is provided for each winning opening and detects a winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When the winning detection means detects that the game medium fired by the launching means has been won in any one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games with respect to the winning opening for the game medium. A payout means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for causing
And an output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes including the first winning hole having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning opening is provided with a winning detection means for detecting a winning of the game medium. Then, when it is detected by the winning detection means that the game medium fired by the launching means has been won in any one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of gaming media with respect to the winning opening for which the game medium has been won Is paid out by the payout means. In addition, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. The And the signal based on the information memorize | stored in the memory | storage means at least is output by an output means. As a result, among the number of game media paid out as a result of winning the winning award based on the output signal, the bonus rate that is the ratio of the first winning award (ie, the actuating action) Can be analyzed and fraudulent acts can be found based on the ratio of the actors.

In the gaming machine A1,
When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the winning means and the launching means has won any one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening that the gaming medium has won. A number-of-payout setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and comprising main control means for performing main control of the game,
A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the launching means has won any one of the winning openings, the payout detecting means pays out based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. The number of game media is set and a payout number setting means for notifying to the payout means is provided, and the main control means for performing the main control of the game has a first value corresponding to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Storage means for accumulating and storing information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the winning opening; storage control means for accumulating the information and storing the information in the storage means; And output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thereby, the winning detection to the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of game media payout based on the detection, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payout, The main control is performed to store the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the storage means and to output the signals based on the information stored in the storage means. Can be done in the means. Therefore, even if the fraudster outputs illegal information from the output means and attempts to prevent the discovery of fraud based on the ratio of the actors, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. Difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discovery of the illegal act based on the ratio of the property by preventing the unauthorized information from being output by the unauthorized person.

In gaming machine A2,
The main control means is stored in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means is stored in the substrate box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened. However, it is difficult to input illegal information even if it is attempted to prevent the discovery of an illegal act based on the ratio of an accessory. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the fraudulent act based on the ratio of the actors from being prevented from being prevented from being discovered by the fraudulent person outputting the illegal information.

In any of gaming machines A1 to 3,
An external device connection means connectable to an external device;
An external device connection detection means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connection means;
The output unit is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit with respect to the external device when the external device connection detection unit detects that the external device is connected. A gaming machine A4 that outputs a signal.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, the following effects are produced. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, it is detected by the external device connection means, and triggered by the detection, a signal based on information accumulated and stored in the storage means for the external device Is output by the output means. Thus, simply by connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the gaming machine, paying out to the external device based on the winning at the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying means. Since a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of played game media is output from the gaming machine, there is an effect that a fraudulent act based on an accessory ratio can be detected quickly and easily.

In any of gaming machines A1 to 4,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in a corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A gaming machine A5 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning at the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. Is output by. Thus, even if the device that has received the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a winning for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the ratio of the actors can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A5,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means A storage means stores information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the game. Machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done.

In gaming machine A6,
The game machine A7, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are produced. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information on winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means that is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first winning opening includes a second winning opening having an accessory that operates continuously based on a game,
The storage control means includes information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, Accumulate and store in the storage means,
The output means stores the game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number and information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means And a gaming machine A8 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first prize opening provided in the game area includes the second prize opening having an accessory that operates continuously based on the game, and corresponds to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. And information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means accumulated and stored in the storage means; The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning in the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is output. As a result, the ratio of the number of game media that have received the signal output from the output means to the first prize opening (that is, the operation of the accessory) out of the number of game media paid out along with the prize winning to the prize opening As well as the ratio of consecutive features, which is a ratio of the second winning a prize opening (that is, the operation of the accessory when the accessory operates continuously). There is an effect that fraud can be detected more accurately based on the ratio of consecutive actors.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the winning means and the launching means has won any one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening that the gaming medium has won. A number-of-payout setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means, and comprising main control means for performing main control of the game,
The main control means has calculation means for executing calculations for performing main control of the game,
At least the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by execution of calculation by the calculation means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are produced. In other words, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the launching means has won any one of the winning openings, the payout detecting means pays out based on the winning opening of the gaming medium. A main control means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means, and for performing main control of the game. Means are provided. Then, at least based on the winning at the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, which is accumulated and stored in the payout detecting means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means. The generation of information related to the ratio of the number of played game media and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means. Thereby, the detection of the winning at the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of game media payout based on the detection, the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set payout number, Storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in one winning opening to the storage means by the storage control means, and output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be performed by the arithmetic unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person outputs illegal information to the output means and tries to prevent the discovery of illegal acts based on the ratio of the actors, it is difficult to input the illegal information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the fraudulent person from being prevented from discovering fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the actors by outputting unauthorized information.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A8,
The main control means for performing the main control of the game,
The main control means includes calculation means for executing calculations for performing main control of the game,
When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the winning means and the launching means has won any one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening that the gaming medium has won. The number-of-payout setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means,
The storage control means and the output means are provided on a separate microchip from the effect means, and a gaming machine B1.

  According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing the control, and any one of the winning detection means and the game medium fired by the launching means is selected. And a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning slot for which the game medium has been won and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the winning prize has been won. This is realized by execution of calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, a storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided in a separate microchip from the calculation means. Thereby, only by providing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be reduced to the first prize opening without significantly rewriting the operation instruction (program) executed by the calculation means. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning. In addition, in order to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means, arithmetic means Thus, an increase in processing load can be suppressed, and a large part of the processing capability of the computing means can be applied to the main control of the game.

In gaming machine B1,
A gaming machine B2 wherein the microchip is provided in the main control means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the rendering means is provided in the main control means. Thereby, based on the set number of payouts, information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means The storage to the storage means and the output of the signal based on the information stored in the storage means are performed in the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudster tries to prevent the discovery of fraudulent acts based on the ratio of the property by outputting fraudulent information to the output means, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. Is difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the discovery of the illegal act based on the ratio of the property by preventing the unauthorized information from being output by the unauthorized person.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
The gaming machine B3, wherein the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box pace and a box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected so as not to be opened.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, the following effects are produced. That is, the main control means and the microchip are housed in a substrate box in which the box pace and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected so that they cannot be opened. Even if it is attempted to output illegal information and prevent discovery of illegal acts based on the ratio of the actors, it is difficult to input illegal information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more surely prevent the fraudulent act based on the ratio of the actors from being prevented from being prevented from being discovered by the fraudulent person outputting the illegal information.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means includes
Each winning opening comprises payout information storage means for storing information relating to the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning at the corresponding winning opening,
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The start-up process is based on the storage of the payout information storage means, and shows information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a win in the corresponding winning opening for each winning prize mouth. A gaming machine B4 including a process for transmitting to the microchip.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are produced. That is, in the main control means, information regarding the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when each winning opening has been won at the corresponding winning opening is stored in the payout information storage means. In the calculation means, a start-up process is executed when the main control means is powered on, and in the start-up process, a corresponding winning mouth is assigned to each winning mouth based on the storage of the payout information storage means. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won is transmitted to the microchip. This allows the microchip to perform main control when the power is turned on, even if information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for winnings at each prize opening differs depending on the type of gaming machine is not stored in the microchip in advance. Based on the information transmitted from the means, the ratio of the actors is calculated, or the signal based on the information is output and the signal output from the output means is received. There is an effect that it can be calculated.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B5, wherein the microchip includes a second calculation unit that performs a calculation for realizing the storage control unit and the output unit.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the microchip is provided with the second calculation means, and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means, and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the calculation of the second calculation means. . Thereby, there is an effect that it is possible to flexibly cope with a function change or specification change of the storage control means, the output means, etc., by changing the calculation instruction (program) of the second effect means.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B6, wherein the microchip realizes the storage control means and the output means by wired logic.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the microchip stores information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the paying means by wired logic. Storage control means for accumulating and storing the information, and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, processing such as storage and output of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means There is an effect that can be performed at high speed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6,
The gaming machine C1 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to hold stored information even when the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are produced. That is, the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means stored in the storage means is: It is held while the power is turned off. As a result, the gaming medium paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of gaming media paid out by the paying means for a long period of time regardless of whether or not the power to the gaming machine is turned on. The information relating to the ratio of the numbers can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the thing which received the signal output from the output means can analyze the ratio of the gaming machine for a long period of time, there is an effect that it can be detected including past fraud.

In the gaming machine C1,
Second storage means that cannot hold information while the power is off;
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means A storage means stores information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the game. Machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The second storage means cannot hold information while the power is turned off. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. The information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, a prize to the first prize opening for the number of game media paid out by the payout means is reflected based on the information stored in the second storage means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, the storage means is configured to be able to retain stored information even when the power is turned off, and generally requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time for writing, and is durable. Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of performance, by configuring as described above, the number of times of writing to the storage unit can be reduced, and the problem of the storage unit can be suppressed from becoming obvious.

In the gaming machine C2,
The gaming machine C3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are produced. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information on winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means that is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means, as information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, A gaming machine D1 characterized in that information indicating a winning detected by the winning detection means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage control means stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. The information indicating the winning opening where the winning is detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. Then, a signal based on this information is output. The one that has received the signal output from the output means is based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means and the winning to the first winning opening based on the information indicating the winning opening from which the winning is detected. The number of game media paid out in this way can be calculated, and the ratio of the objects can be analyzed from these numbers. And when a suspicious change is recognized in an accessory ratio, the cause can be deeply searched based on the information which shows the winning opening from which the winning was detected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably detect an illegal act based on the ratio of the accessory.

In the gaming machine D1,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means pays the payout means information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. The information is related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out on the basis of winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of played game media, and is accumulated and stored in the storage means. A gaming machine D2.

  According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined trigger has been missed by the determining means, the information related to the winning detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storage means is the number of game media paid out by the paying means, Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings is based on the winning in the first winning opening for the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means. As information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out in this manner, it can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done.

In the gaming machine D2,
The gaming machine D3, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are produced. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information on winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means that is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in a corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A gaming machine D4 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning at the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. Is output by. Thus, even if the device that has received the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a winning for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that it is possible to calculate and analyze an accessory ratio from information relating to winnings output from.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means A ratio calculating means for calculating the ratio of the number,
The game machine D5, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the paying means is The ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means. A signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (object ratio) when the signal output from the output means is received, and there is an effect that it is possible to easily analyze fraud. In addition, when the signal output by the output means is received and an attempt is made to calculate the ratio of an accessory, if there is a prize at the corresponding prize opening at each prize opening set incorrectly or incorrectly On the other hand, there is a possibility that the bonus rate is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

In gaming machine D5,
The output means includes a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine D6, which outputs a signal indicating the above.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are produced. In other words, the first signal corresponding to the number of game media paid out by the payout means calculated by the ratio calculation means and the signal indicating the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means and accumulated in the storage means. A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the winning opening is output by the output means. Thus, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (composition ratio) output from the output means, the cause is searched for from the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means that is also output. There is an effect that can be.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost;
The first means for the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. A ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in a winning opening;
The storage control means causes the storage means to accumulate and store information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means.

  According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the first prize opening is awarded for the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, since the calculated ratio (object ratio) is output, it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (object ratio) when receiving the signal output by the output means, and analysis of fraud There is an effect that can be facilitated. Also, when trying to calculate the ratio of an accessory when the signal output by the output means is received, if there is a prize at the corresponding prize opening at each winning prize set incorrectly or incorrectly There is a risk that the ratio of the bonus will be calculated based on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. Further, since the information indicating the proportion of an accessory is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information on winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means that is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined. Further, since the information stored in the storage means is the bonus ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means, and therefore the information related to the winning is used. This has the effect of deeply analyzing the cause of the situation suspected of fraud.

In the gaming machine E1 or E2,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in a corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A gaming machine E3 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning at the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. Is output by. As a result, when there is a situation in which an illegal act is suspected by analyzing the ratio of actors, the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when each winning prize is awarded to the corresponding winning prize is referred to. Thus, it is possible to find the cause of the situation.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening after the predetermined trigger has passed and before the next predetermined trigger is stopped is counted for each winning slot. A second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means uses the information stored in the second storage means for the number of game media paid out by the payout means when it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that it is accumulated and stored in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of gaming media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening.

  According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening until the next predetermined trigger is stopped after the predetermined trigger is lost is counted for each winning slot by the second storage control means. The information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning slot is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means pays out the information indicating the winning game medium stored in the second storage means and counted for each winning mouth. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of played game media is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. In this way, first, the prizes detected by the prize detection means are counted by the second storage control means for each prize opening, so that the prize winning at the prize opening is not missed and the information stored in the second storage means It can be reflected. Then, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, the information indicating the number of game media won for each winning slot, which is stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings, is paid out by the payout means. As the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of the game, it can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of game media for each winning opening from when a predetermined trigger is lost until the next predetermined trigger is canceled, the storage means has a necessary storage capacity. There is an effect that the increase can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the second storage means stores information indicating the number of game media won in each winning opening until the next predetermined opportunity is canceled after the predetermined opportunity is lost, the second storage means is necessary for the second storage means. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In gaming machine F1,
The gaming machine F2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning slot including the winning to the latest winning slot stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is an illegal act including the latest winning situation.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in a corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A gaming machine F3 which outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning at the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. Is output by. Thus, even if the device that has received the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a winning for each winning port in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that it is possible to calculate and analyze an accessory ratio from information relating to winnings output from.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means A ratio calculating means for calculating the ratio of the number,
The game machine F4, wherein the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the paying means is The ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means. A signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. Thereby, it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (community ratio) when the signal output from the output means is received, and there is an effect that the fraud analysis can be facilitated. In addition, for those who received the signal output from the output means, when trying to calculate the ratio of an accessory, if there was a prize at the corresponding prize opening at each prize opening set incorrectly or incorrectly On the other hand, there is a possibility that the bonus rate is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine F4, since the accessory ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio can be accurately calculated.

In gaming machine F4,
The output means includes a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means. A gaming machine F5, which outputs a signal indicating the above.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4, the following effects are produced. That is, as the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, a signal indicating the number of game media won in each winning opening from the time when a predetermined trigger is lost until the next predetermined trigger is ended, The signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means calculated by the ratio calculating means is output means. Is output by. As a result, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (object ratio) that is output from the output means, after the predetermined trigger that has been output is lost, the next predetermined trigger is canceled. There is an effect that the cause can be searched for from the number of game media for each winning opening.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening after the predetermined trigger has passed and before the next predetermined trigger is stopped is counted for each winning slot. A second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost;
The first means for the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the determining means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. A ratio calculating means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in a winning opening;
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are produced. That is, based on the detection by the winning detection means, the number of game media won in each winning opening until the next predetermined trigger is stopped after the predetermined trigger is lost is counted for each winning slot by the second storage control means. The information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning slot is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the first prize opening is awarded for the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the ratio is calculated by the ratio calculation means. Information indicating the calculated ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. As a result, since the calculated ratio (object ratio) is output, it is not necessary to calculate the ratio (object ratio) when receiving the signal output by the output means, and analysis of fraud There is an effect that can be facilitated. In addition, for those who received the signal output from the output means, when trying to calculate the ratio of an accessory, if there was a prize at the corresponding prize opening at each prize opening set incorrectly or incorrectly There is a risk that the ratio of the bonus will be calculated based on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. Further, since the information indicating the proportion of an accessory is accumulated and stored in the storage unit, the amount of information stored in the storage unit can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage unit can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the second storage means stores information indicating the number of game media won in each winning opening until the next predetermined opportunity is canceled after the predetermined opportunity is lost, the second storage means is necessary for the second storage means. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are produced. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning slot including the winning to the latest winning slot stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is an illegal act including the latest winning situation. In addition, while the information stored in the storage means is the ratio of the bonuses, the information stored in the second storage means is stored in each winning a prize opening after the predetermined trigger has passed. Since this information indicates the number of winning game media, using this information has the effect of deeply analyzing the cause of a situation suspected of fraud.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output means indicates a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in a corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. A gaming machine G3 that outputs at least a signal for indicating.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are produced. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means and a signal for indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when there is a winning at the corresponding winning opening at each winning opening. Is output by. In this way, if the signal received from the output means is analyzed and the ratio of the actors is present and there is a situation where fraud is suspected, each winning entry will receive a corresponding winning entry With reference to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, the cause of the situation can be searched.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3,
Second storage control means for storing in the second storage means information related to winnings detected by the winning detection means from when a predetermined opportunity has passed until the next predetermined opportunity has passed;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means A storage means stores information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the game. Machine H1.

  According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, the following effects are achieved. . In other words, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means from the time when the predetermined trigger is lost until the next predetermined trigger is canceled in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, since the second storage means stores only information related to the winnings detected by the winning detection means from when the predetermined trigger is lost until the next predetermined trigger is stopped, the storage capacity of the second storage means is increased. There is an effect that it can be kept small.

In the gaming machine H1,
The gaming machine H2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the output unit outputs not only a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit but also a signal based on the information stored in the second storage unit. As a result, information on winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means that is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2,
The gaming machine H3, wherein the second storage means is configured to be able to hold stored information even when the power is turned off.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are produced. In other words, the information relating to the winning, which is detected by the winning detection means between the time when the predetermined trigger is lost and the time when the next predetermined trigger is stopped, is stored while the power is turned off. As a result, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of information related to winnings that are stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the reliability of the output signal is improved. There is an effect that it can be increased.

In gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost;
Power interruption detection means for detecting that the power is cut off,
The storage control unit stores the second storage unit when the determination unit determines that the predetermined trigger has been lost and when the power-off detection unit detects that the power supply is cut off. The game medium paid out on the basis of winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means Information relating to the ratio of the numbers is stored in the storage means.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, The effect of. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when the power-off detection means detects that the power is cut off, the payout means pays out based on the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning at the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media received is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined trigger is taken, and even when the power is turned off before the predetermined trigger is taken off, all winnings are reflected and paid out. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of information related to winnings that is stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the game medium paid out by the payout means There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of.

In the gaming machine I1,
Comprising power supply means capable of supplying power for at least a predetermined period even after the power is turned off;
The gaming machine I2, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to at least the storage control means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power-off detection unit detects that the power is cut off, the storage control unit uses the power to store the information related to the prize detected by the prize detection unit stored in the second storage unit. Based on the above, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means is surely stored in the storage means. There is an effect that can be.

In the gaming machine I2,
The gaming machine I3, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are produced. In other words, not only the storage control means but also the second storage means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Thus, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the payout means surely pays out based on the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning at the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media can be stored in the storage means.

In gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The second storage means is configured to be able to hold the stored information while the power is turned off,
The storage control means receives a winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the power is supplied and when the determination means determines that the predetermined trigger has been lost. Based on the information on the storage means, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means A gaming machine I4 characterized by being stored in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine I4, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3 In addition to the following effects. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even while the power is turned off. The payout means is based on the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the power is supplied and when the judgment means determines that the predetermined trigger has been lost. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out in accordance with the above is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. . Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means reflecting all winnings when power is supplied and every time a predetermined trigger is taken The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is cut off, the information related to the winning that is stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage means after the power supply. And the loss of the information stored in the second storage means can be suppressed. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect. Further, when it is detected that the power is turned off, if the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, the power is stored during the storage of the information in the storage means. There is a possibility that supply may be interrupted and information stored in the storage means may not be reflected reflecting all the information stored in the second storage means, or strange information may be stored in the storage means. Is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

In gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means Storing information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means;
The predetermined opportunity includes the fact that the number of game media launched into the game area has reached a predetermined number.

  According to the gaming machine J1, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4 has an effect In addition to the following effects. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. Further, since the predetermined opportunity includes that the number of game media launched into the game area has reached a predetermined number, the game media paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game media was launched It is possible to calculate a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on a winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number (a bonus ratio). Therefore, since many game media can win the various winning awards and calculate the bonus rate at the stage where the payout is performed, the average bonus rate can be calculated. Accordingly, since fluctuations in the ratio of the actors in a short time in a normal game can be eliminated, it is possible to more easily analyze fraud in those that have received the signal output by the output means.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means Storing information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means;
The predetermined opportunity includes that the current time has become a predetermined time, and the gaming machine J2.

  According to gaming machine J2, any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 In addition to the effects to be achieved, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, since the predetermined time includes that the current time has become the predetermined time, even if the game is not performed, the predetermined time has arrived and the payout means is surely paid out. It is possible to calculate a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media (composition item ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to surely analyze the presence or absence of fraudulent acts on the signal received from the output means by the reliably calculated accessory ratio.

In gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means Storing information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means;
The predetermined opportunity includes a game machine J3 characterized in that a cumulative time in which a game has been performed reaches a predetermined time.

  According to gaming machine J3, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2 In addition to the effects of Kagami, the following effects are achieved. In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, the predetermined opportunity includes that the accumulated time in which the game has been performed has become a predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (the ratio of the bonuses) is essentially that of the game ball. It is calculated by performing a trial test for 10 hours. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the prize winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is triggered when the game time reaches a predetermined time. As a result, it is possible to calculate an accessory ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the signal received from the output means can be analyzed by using the actor ratio close to the original definition.

Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means Storing information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means;
The predetermined opportunity includes the fact that the cumulative time during which power is supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

  According to gaming machine J4, gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3 In addition to the effects of Kagami, the following effects are achieved.

In other words, the second storage control unit temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection unit in the second storage unit. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done. In addition, since the predetermined time includes that the cumulative time during which power is supplied has reached the second predetermined time, the time when the power is supplied is the first time even in situations where there is not much game play. When the predetermined time of 2 is reached, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (the ratio of the bonuses) ) Can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that the analysis of the presence / absence of fraudulent acts can be surely performed on the one that has received the signal output from the output means according to the surely calculated accessory ratio. , B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
The main control means for performing the main control of the game,
The main control means includes calculation means for executing calculations for performing main control of the game,
When the winning detection means detects that the game medium launched by the winning means and the launching means has won any one of the winning openings, the payout is made based on the winning opening that the gaming medium has won. The number-of-payout setting means for setting the number of game media to be issued and notifying the payout means is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation means,
The storage control means and the output means are provided in a separate microchip from the effect means,
The microchip is
Second storage control means for storing information on a winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage means;
A determination means for determining that a predetermined opportunity has been lost,
The storage control means, based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means, when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has been lost, the payout means Storing information related to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of game media paid out by the storage means;
The main control means includes
A predetermined trigger information storage unit for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger;
The arithmetic means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The start-up process includes a process for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

  According to gaming machine J5, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4 In addition to the effects of Kagami, the following effects are achieved. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with a calculation means for executing a calculation for performing the control, and any one of the winning detection means and the game medium fired by the launching means is selected. And a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning slot for which the game medium has been won and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the winning prize has been won. This is realized by execution of calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, a storage control for accumulating and storing in the storage means information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are provided in a separate microchip from the calculation means. Thereby, only by providing another microchip, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be reduced to the first prize opening without significantly rewriting the operation instruction (program) executed by the calculation means. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning.

  In addition, in order to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the paying-out means, arithmetic means Thus, an increase in processing load can be suppressed, and a large part of the processing capability of the computing means can be applied to the main control of the game. In the microchip, the second storage control means temporarily stores information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when it is determined by the judging means that the predetermined opportunity has been lost. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thereby, first, by storing the information related to the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means, the winning at the winning opening is not missed and can be reflected in the information stored in the second storage means. . Based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity is reached, all winnings are reflected and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is awarded to the first prize opening. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that can be done.

  On the other hand, in the main control unit, the predetermined trigger is stored in the predetermined trigger information storage unit. Then, the calculation means executes a start-up process when the main control means is turned on. During the start-up process, a predetermined trigger is generated based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. The indicated information is transmitted to the microchip. Here, the storage of information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening (the ratio of bonuses) to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is the bonus Since there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information related to the ratio, the chance of storage is not fixed by the microchip, but the probability of jackpot and the probability change ratio in the gaming machine is taken into consideration. It is preferable that Therefore, the main control unit stores the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage unit, and each time the power is turned on, the information indicating the predetermined trigger is transmitted to the microchip. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability or the probability variation rate in the machine ( There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the accessory can be stored in the storage means.

Game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
A third storage control means for accumulating information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and storing the information in a third storage means;
The gaming machine K1, wherein the output means outputs information indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means.

  According to gaming machine K1, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5 In addition to the effects of Kagaku, there are the following effects. That is, the third storage control means accumulates information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and stores it in the third storage means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. As a result, when the signal output from the output means is in a situation where fraud is suspected, the gaming state of the gaming machine can be analyzed to find out the cause.

In the gaming machine K1,
A door frame covering the front of the gaming area;
A gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is open.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine K1, there are the following effects. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame covering the front of the gaming area is open, so that the one that received the signal output from the output means There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed from the occurrence state of the state in which the door frame is open.

In the gaming machine K1 or K2,
A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error state of the gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, there are the following effects. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the gaming machine, so that the one that received the signal output from the output means is the occurrence status of the gaming machine error state. Therefore, there is an effect that it can be determined whether or not there is a possibility of fraud.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K3,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined gaming value is given to the player.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, there are the following effects. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player. There is an effect that it can be determined whether or not there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed from the occurrence state of the hit state of the gaming machine.

In any of the gaming machines K1 to K4,
The gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which it is detected that any winning opening has been won by the winning detection means within a predetermined time. A gaming machine K5.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, there are the following effects. That is, the gaming state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state where it is detected by any of the winning detection means by any of the winning detection means within a predetermined time. Therefore, if the signal output from the output means is received, whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed based on whether or not a winning state is included outside business hours such as late-night hours There is an effect that it can be judged.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, The gaming machine L1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, The gaming machine L2, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, The gaming machine L3, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

  The “sphere” described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the “game medium” in the claims, and the “actual object ratio” described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the “payout means” in the claims. Corresponding to the “ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the first winning opening” with respect to the number of played game media, and the “continuous character ratio” described in the above embodiments is This corresponds to the “ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning in the second winning opening to the number of game media paid out by the payout means” in the claims.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
63a 1st normal winning entrance (winning entrance)
63b 2nd Ordinary Winning Port (Winning Port)
64a First start port (winning port, first winning port)
64b 2nd starting port (winning port, 1st winning port)
65a Grand Prize (Winner, First Prize, Second Prize)
100 Substrate box 110 Main control device (main control means)
111 Dispensing control device (dispensing means)
112a Ball launch unit (launch means)
201 MPU (calculation means)
202e prize ball number table (payout information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined opportunity information storage means)
207 Property ratio management chip (microchip)
208a First start port switch (winning detection means)
208b Second start port switch (winning detection means)
208c First normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d Second normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Grand prize opening switch (winning detection means)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 First reading memory (second storage means)
H.264 second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 capacitor (power supply means)
207a Inspection terminal (external device connection means)
300 Inspection device (external device)
S152 (payout number setting means)
S717 (Power failure detection means)
S728 (second storage control means)
S729 (determination means)
S740, S741 (storage control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third storage control means)
S761 (storage control means)
S751-S754, S771, S772 (output means)

Claims (2)

A gaming area provided with a plurality of winning openings including a first winning opening having an accessory that operates based on a game;
Launching means for launching gaming media into the gaming area;
A winning detection means that is provided for each winning opening and detects a winning of the game medium to the corresponding winning opening;
When the winning detection means detects that the game medium fired by the launching means has been won in any one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games with respect to the winning opening for the game medium. A payout means for paying out the medium;
Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning opening with respect to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in the storage means. Storage control means for causing
And an output unit that outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the storage unit is configured to be able to hold the stored information even when the power is turned off.

Images